Agilent FieldFox Analyzers

Transcription

1 Agilent FieldFx Analyzers N9913A, N9914A N9915A, N9916A, N9917A, N9918A N9925A, N9926A, N9927A, N9928A N9935A, N9936A, N9937A, N9938A User s Guide Manufacturing Part Number: N Print Date: May 23, 2014 Supersedes: Nvember 1, 2013 Agilent Technlgies, Inc.

2 Warranty Statement The material cntained in this dcument is prvided "as is," and is subject t being changed, withut ntice, in future editins. Further, t the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Agilent disclaims all warranties, either express r implied with regard t this manual and any infrmatin cntained herein, including but nt limited t the implied warranties f merchantability and fitness fr a particular purpse. Agilent shall nt be liable fr errrs r fr incidental r cnsequential damages in cnnectin with the furnishing, use, r perfrmance f this dcument r any infrmatin cntained herein. Shuld Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms cvering the material in this dcument that cnflict with these terms, the warranty terms in the separate agreement will cntrl. DFARS/Restricted Rights Ntice If sftware is fr use in the perfrmance f a U.S. Gvernment prime cntract r subcntract, Sftware is delivered and licensed as Cmmercial cmputer sftware as defined in DFAR (June 1995), r as a cmmercial item as defined in FAR 2.101(a) r as Restricted cmputer sftware as defined in FAR (June 1987) r any equivalent agency regulatin r cntract clause. Use, duplicatin r disclsure f Sftware is subject t Agilent Technlgies standard cmmercial license terms, and nn-dod Departments and Agencies f the U.S. Gvernment will receive n greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR (c)(1 2) (June 1987). U.S. Gvernment users will receive n greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR (June 1987) r DFAR (b) (2) (Nvember 1995), as applicable in any technical data. Technlgy Licenses The hardware and/r sftware described in this dcument are furnished under a license and may be used r cpied nly in accrdance with the terms f such license. Cntacting Agilent Assistance with test and measurements needs and infrmatin n finding a lcal Agilent ffice are available n the Web at: If yu d nt have access t the Internet, please cntact yur Agilent field engineer. In any crrespndence r telephne cnversatin, refer t the Agilent prduct by its mdel number and full serial number. With this infrmatin, the Agilent representative can determine whether yur prduct is still within its warranty perid. Safety and Regulatry Infrmatin The safety and regulatry infrmatin pertaining t this prduct is lcated n page 216. Where t Find the Latest Infrmatin Dcumentatin is updated peridically. Fr the latest infrmatin, please visit: Sftware Updates Is yur prduct sftware up-t-date? Peridically, Agilent releases sftware updates t fix knwn defects and incrprate prduct enhancements. T search fr sftware updates fr yur prduct, g t the Agilent Technical Supprt website at: r 2 FieldFx User s Guide

3 Elements f this prduct's Sftware use SharpZipLib as an "as prvided" stand alne capability. Cpyright 2004 Jhn Reilly This prgram is free sftware; yu can redistribute it and/r mdify it under the terms f the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Sftware Fundatin; either versin 2 f the License, r (at yur ptin) any later versin. This prgram is distributed in the hpe that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; withut even the implied warranty f MERCHANTABILITY r FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License fr mre details. T receive a cpy f the GNU General Public License, write t the Free Sftware Fundatin, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Bstn, MA , USA. Linking this library statically r dynamically with ther mdules is making a cmbined wrk based n this library. Thus, the terms and cnditins f the GNU General Public License cver the whle cmbinatin. As a special exceptin, the cpyright hlders f this library give yu permissin t link this library with independent mdules t prduce an executable, regardless f the license terms f these independent mdules, and t cpy and distribute the resulting executable under terms f yur chice, prvided that yu als meet, fr each linked independent mdule, the terms and cnditins f the license f that mdule. An independent mdule is a mdule which is nt derived frm r based n this library. If yu mdify this library, yu may extend this exceptin t yur versin f the library, but yu are nt bligated t d s. If yu d nt wish t d s, delete this exceptin statement frm yur versin. Elements f this prduct's sftware use ANTLR. Cpyright (c) Terence Parr All rights reserved. Cnversin t C#: Cpyright (c) Sam Harwell, Pixel Mine, Inc. All rights reserved. Redistributin and use in surce and binary frms, with r withut mdificatin, are permitted prvided that the fllwing cnditins are met: 1. Redistributins f surce cde must retain the abve cpyright ntice, this list f cnditins and the fllwing disclaimer. 2. Redistributins in binary frm must reprduce the abve cpyright ntice, this list f cnditins and the fllwing disclaimer in the dcumentatin and/r ther materials prvided with the distributin. 3. The name f the authr may nt be used t endrse r prmte prducts derived frm this sftware withut specific prir written permissin. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. FieldFx User s Guide 3

4 A Firmware Release Updates... 7 Overview... 8 Mdels and Optins... 8 Accessries... 8 FieldFx Manuals, Sftware, and Supplemental Help... 9 Preparing fr Initial Use f Yur New FieldFx Check the Shipment Meeting Pwer Requirements fr the AC/DC Adapter Install the Lithium-In Battery FieldFx ON/OFF Settings FieldFx High-Temperature Prtectin Avid Overpwering the FieldFx Take the FieldFx Tur Frnt Panel Tp Panel Right Side Panel Left Side Panel Screen Tur Hw t Enter Numeric Values CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mde CAT Mde Settings Return Lss Measurements Prt Cable Lss Measurements Prt Insertin Lss Measurements DTF (Distance t Fault) Measurements DTF Measurement Settings NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde NA Mde Settings Time Dmain - Optin Time Dmain (Transfrm) Settings Trace Settings FieldFx User s Guide

5 Gating Calibratin fr NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes Verifying Calibratin and Jumper Cable Integrity Calibratin Methd Summary SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde SA Mde Settings Channel Measurements Interference Analyzer (SA Mde) - Optin Spectrgram and Waterfall Displays Recrd Playback Reflectin Mde (SA Mdels) Reflectin Mde Settings Built-in Pwer Meter Mde - Optin Built-in Pwer Meter Settings Pwer Meter (USB) Mde USB Pwer Meter Settings Frequency Offset using Pwer Sensr (FOPS) Optin FOPS Settings Pulse Measurements Mde - Optin Pulse Measurement Settings VVM (Vectr Vltmeter) Mde - Optin Overview VVM Mde Settings Prt Cable Trimming Measurements Prt Transmissin Measurements A/B and B/A Measurements Data Analysis Features All abut Markers All abut Limit Lines FieldFx User s Guide 5

6 All abut Trace Math File Management Saving and Recalling Files Printing System Settings Run/Hld Preset User Preset Audi (Vlume) Cntrl Display Settings Preferences System Cnfiguratin Service Diagnstics Wrking with the Lithium-In Battery Viewing Battery Charge Status Charging the Battery Recnditining the Battery Battery Care Maximizing Battery Life Lithium In Battery Dispsal Safety Cnsideratins Certificatin and Cmpliance Statements Appendix A: Cnnectr Care Review Appendix B: Specificatins/Data Sheet Appendix C: Instrument Calibratin Index FieldFx User s Guide

7 A Firmware Release Updates Fr custmers upgrading FieldFx firmware, the fllwing is a list f changes frm the previus release: NA Mde Mixed-mde Measurements Parameter Cnversin NA/CAT Calibratins 1-prt Respnse Calibratins Waveguide Effective Velcity Factr SA Mde Lng Sweep Time Alert USB Pwer Meter Mde Frequency Offset (Opt 208) Ext Zer fr U8480 series Supprt fr U8488A (67 GHz) Pulse Measurements (Opt 330) Trace Memry Built-in Pwer Meter Mde SCPI cmmands added Radi Standard All Mdes (System) USB Keybard Supprt... 8 USB Printer Supprt Overview 7

8 Overview Mdels and Optins Mdels Mdel Max Freq (GHz) Descriptin N9913A 4 Vectr Netwrk Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer N9914A 6.5 Vectr Netwrk Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer N9915A 9 Vectr Netwrk Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer N9916A 14 Vectr Netwrk Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer N9917A 18 Vectr Netwrk Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer N9918A 26.5 Vectr Netwrk Analyzer AND Spectrum Analyzer N9925A 9 Vectr Netwrk Analyzer N9926A 14 Vectr Netwrk Analyzer N9927A 18 Vectr Netwrk Analyzer N9928A 26.5 Vectr Netwrk Analyzer N9935A 9 Spectrum Analyzer N9936A 14 Spectrum Analyzer N9937A 18 Spectrum Analyzer N9938A 26.5 Spectrum Analyzer Minimum Frequency: 30 khz fr all mdels FieldFx Optins: Fr a cmprehensive list, view the FieldFx Cnfiguratin Guide at: Accessries The fllwing accessries are included with every FieldFx. Spare accessries can be rdered at any time. NOTE Accessry Part Number N9910X 873 N9910X 870 N9910X 880 N9910X 890 N9910X 891 Descriptin AC/DC Adapter Lithium-In Battery Sftcase w/ Backpack & Shulder Strap User s Guide (printed cpy) Quick Reference Guide (printed cpy) Althugh nt supplied, a USB keybard CAN be used with the FieldFx. T see a cmplete list f accessries that are available fr the FieldFx, please visit: 8 FieldFx User s Guide

9 FieldFx Manuals, Sftware, and Supplemental Help The fllwing manuals and sftware are available fr the FieldFx. T access all f these, visit: User s Guide This manual, included with shipment. Quick Reference Guide Printed cpy with laminated pages fr utdr use included with shipment. Supplemental Online Help - Cncepts and Reference infrmatin. Prgramming Guide Online, ffline and pdf versins. FieldFx Data Link Sftware and Help Free dwnlad. Service Guide Free dwnlad. Firmware Updates Check t see if yu have the latest FieldFx firmware. Cnventins that are used in the Manual Hardkey indicates a frnt panel buttn. The functinality f these buttns des nt change. The six Sftkey menus change dynamically and fllw these clr cnventins: Sftkey Blue indicates an available setting. Sftkey Green indicates a change in menu level when selected. Sftkey Black indicates the default r selected setting. Sftkey Yellw indicates an active entry in prcess. Sftkey Grey indicates a key that is NOT available. Safety Ntes The fllwing safety ntes are used thrughut this manual. Familiarize yurself with each f the ntes and its meaning befre perating this instrument. Mre pertinent safety ntes fr using this prduct are lcated in Safety Cnsideratins n page 222. CAUTION WARNING Cautin dentes a hazard. It calls attentin t a prcedure that, if nt crrectly perfrmed r adhered t, culd result in damage t r destructin f the prduct. D nt prceed beynd a cautin ntice until the indicated cnditins are fully understd and met. Warning dentes a hazard. It calls attentin t a prcedure which, if nt crrectly perfrmed r adhered t, culd result in injury r lss f life. D nt prceed beynd a warning nte until the indicated cnditins are fully understd and met. Overview 9

10 Preparing fr Initial Use f Yur New FieldFx Check the Shipment When yu receive yur FieldFx, check the shipment accrding t the fllwing prcedure: 1. Inspect the shipping cntainer fr damage. Signs f damage may include a dented r trn shipping cntainer r cushining material that indicates signs f unusual stress r cmpacting. If nt damaged, save the packaging material in case the FieldFx needs t be returned. 2. Carefully remve the cntents frm the shipping cntainer, and verify that the standard accessries and yur rdered ptins are included in the shipment accrding t the Bx Cntents List. 3. Fr any questin r prblems, refer t Cntacting Agilent n page 2. Meeting Pwer Requirements fr the AC/DC Adapter Vltage: Frequency: Current: 100 VAC t 250 VAC 50 Hz t 60 Hz A The AC/DC adapter supplied with the analyzer is equipped with a three-wire pwer crd, in accrdance with internatinal safety standards. The pwer cable apprpriate t the riginal prduct shipping lcatin is included with the FieldFx. Varius AC pwer cables are available frm Agilent that are unique t specific gegraphic areas. Yu can rder additinal AC pwer cables that are crrect fr use in different areas. Fr the pwer crd part number infrmatin please visit: 10 FieldFx User s Guide

11 Install the Lithium-In Battery Step Ntes 1. Open the battery dr. Push the buttn n the battery cmpartment dr while sliding the dr utward. 2. Insert the battery. The terminals end f the battery is inserted int the cmpartment. 3. Clse the battery dr. Slide the battery cmpartment dr upwards until it latches. Battery Usage NOTE When yu receive yur FieldFx, the lithium-in battery is nt installed, and it is partially charged t apprximately 40% t preserve battery life. A lithium-in battery has n memry effect, s it can be used partially charged, as shipped. A fully charged battery will pwer yur FieldFx fr abut fur hurs, s if yu plan t use it fr this lng, yu shuld fully charge the battery. The FieldFx will shut dwn t prevent the battery frm discharging t a level that is damaging. If this ccurs, charge the battery either internally r externally. Learn mre abut the lithium-in battery n page 216. Battery charge status is viewable: In the upper-right crner f the screen. On the Battery screen. T access the screen, select System, Service Diagnstics, and Battery. On the battery. Open the FieldFx battery cmpartment dr t view the battery LCD. T cnserve battery pwer: Use Run/Hld t single-trigger a measurement when needed. Hld is shwn n the display. Press System then Display then Brightness. Use the arrws, the rtary knb, r numeric keypad t adjust the brightness t dim the FieldFx display as much as pssible. Briefly press the pwer buttn t switch t Stand By mde when the FieldFx is nt being used. Press again t restre pwer. All current settings are preserved. Preparing fr Initial Use f Yur New FieldFx 11

12 NOTE When pwered by the battery nly, the FieldFx can stay in Stand By mde fr a maximum f fur hurs and then it pwers ff autmatically. When the relative battery charge drps abut 20%, the FieldFx will pwer ff t preserve the remaining charge. T recharge a battery: Use ONLY a FieldFx charger t recharge a battery. The battery can be fully charged while in the FieldFx in abut 4 hurs with the FieldFx either ON r OFF. The battery can be fully charged externally using the external battery charger in abut 4 hurs. When the battery is remved, the FieldFx can still be pwered by the AC/DC adapter. FieldFx ON/OFF Settings T turn pwer ON, briefly press the pwer buttn. Bt-up takes abut 1 minute. T switch t Stand By mde (lw battery drain), briefly press the pwer buttn. T turn pwer ON, briefly press the pwer buttn. Pwer and settings are restred instantly. See the Nte abve cncerning Stand By mde. T turn Pwer OFF (very lw battery drain), press and hld the pwer buttn until pwer is OFF - abut 4 secnds. Data and instrument state are NOT autmatically saved when the FieldFx is pwered OFF. Learn hw t save data and instrument state n page 190. Yu can make a setting t autmatically Pwer ON the FieldFx when a pwer surce is cnnected. Learn hw n page 213. Pwer buttn LED status Slid green Pwer is ON Blinking green FieldFx in Stand By mde Blinking amber Battery charging. Blinking amber and green Stand By mde and battery charging. Nt lit Pwer is Off and battery is nt charging. FieldFx High-Temperature Prtectin NOTE The fllwing features prevent degradatin r damage in the event f high internal temperatures in the FieldFx. D NOT stre the FieldFx in the sftcase while pwered ON r in Stand By mde. Hw t mnitr the internal FieldFx temperature: Press System, then Service Diagnstics. Then Internal Temperatures. 12 FieldFx User s Guide

13 The temperature at which the fllwing events ccur is the average f the RF1, RF2, SB1, SB2 temperatures. These temperatures cme frm internal sensrs embedded within FieldFx. Temperature Cntrl Mde NOTE At apprximately 73 C, the FieldFx enters Temperature Cntrl mde by reducing display intensity, switching t Outdr Sun display clrs, and reducing measurement speed. This shuld decrease the internal temperature which preserves measurement accuracy and maintains the lng-term reliability f the FieldFx. When this ccurs, the fllwing message is displayed n the FieldFx screen: The system is entering Temperature Cntrl Mde due t high internal temperature. When entering Temperature Cntrl mde, save yur instrument state and data that yu want t keep. When the temperature drps t apprximately 71 C, a message is displayed indicating that the FieldFx is leaving Temperature Cntrl Mde and nrmal perating settings are restred. Measurement speed specificatins d NOT apply in Temperature Cntrl Mde. High-Temp Shutdwn In extreme situatins, Temperature Cntrl mde may nt stp an increase in the FieldFx internal temperature. At apprximately 75 C, High-Temperature Shutdwn will engage and turn OFF the FieldFx. Just prir t shutdwn, the FieldFx will display a warning f imminent shut dwn. Avid Overpwering the FieldFx The FieldFx can be damaged with t much pwer r vltage applied. Exceeding the maximum RF pwer levels shwn belw will cause an ADC Over Range message t appear n the screen. WARNING Maximum Input Vltages and Pwer: RF IN/OUT Cnnectrs: ±50 VDC, +27 dbm RF DC Input: 19 t 19 VDC, 40 Watts maximum when charging battery Learn mre abut Maximum pwer and vltages in the FieldFx Data Sheet n page 232. NOTE Very ften, caxial cables and antennas build up a static charge, which, if allwed t discharge by cnnecting t the FieldFx, may damage the instrument input circuitry. T avid such damage, it is recmmended t dissipate any static charges by temprarily attaching a shrt t the cable r antenna prir t attaching t the FieldFx. Preparing fr Initial Use f Yur New FieldFx 13

14 Take the FieldFx Tur Frnt Panel 14 FieldFx User s Guide

15 Frnt Panel N. Captin Descriptin Learn Mre n Page: 1 Pwer ON: press mmentarily. STAND BY: with FieldFx pwer ON, press briefly. OFF: press and hld until the FieldFx shuts ff (abut 4 secnds). 2 LED Nt lit: FieldFx OFF, nt charging Green: FieldFx ON. Charging status indicated by battery icn n screen Orange, flashing: FieldFx STAND BY Orange, intensity increasing, flashing slwly: FieldFx OFF, charging 3 System Displays a submenu fr system setup Functin keys Includes: Freq/Dist, Scale/Amptd, BW, Sweep, Trace, Meas Setup, Measure, and Mde 5 Preset Returns the analyzer t a knwn state Enter Cnfirms a parameter selectin r cnfiguratin -- 7 Marker Activates marker functin Mkr /Tls Displays a submenu fr marker functins Esc Exits and clses the dialg bx r clears the character input Save/Recall Saves the current trace r recalls saved data frm memry Limit Sets limit lines fr quick Pass/Fail judgment Run/Hld Tggles between free Run and Hld/Single peratin Cal Displays a submenu fr calibratin functins Arrw keys Increases r decreases a value r setting Back Returns t the previus menu selectin Rtary knb Highlights an item fr selectin, r enables incremental changes t values. 17 Sftkeys Allws selectin f settings fr cnfiguring and perfrming measurements, and fr ther FieldFx functins. 18 Screen Transflective screen, viewable under all lighting cnditins. If yu are using yur FieldFx in direct sunlight, yu d nt need t shield the display frm the sunlight. In bright lighting cnditins, the display is brighter and easier t read when yu allw light t fall directly n the screen. Alternative clr mdes exist that maximize viewing in direct sunlight cnditins, as well as ther cnditins such as nighttime wrk. Nte: Clean the Transflective screen with gentle and minimal wiping using Isprpyl alchl applied t a lint-free clth Refer t specific Mde Display settings 18 - Screen Tur Preparing fr Initial Use f Yur New FieldFx 15

16 Tp Panel Captin Descriptin Learn Mre Prt 1 RF Output Prt 2 SA RF Input GPS Ant Ref In Trig In Fr CAT and NA measurements, use t make reflectin measurements. Maximum: ±50 VDC, +27 dbm RF Fr SA, use t make all measurements. Fr CAT, NA, and VVM mde, use t make Prt 2 transmissin measurements. Maximum: ±50 VDC, +27 dbm RF. Fr use with built-in GPS. Prduces a 3.3 VDC bias vltage fr the antenna pre-amplifier. Use with a GPS antenna such as N9910X-825. Other GPS antennas can als be used. Frequency Reference Surce and External Trigger Input signal. Maximum: 5.5 VDC. CAT Mde n page 20 NA Mde n page 39 SA Mde n page 81 GPS n page 206. Freq. Ref n page 209. Ext Trig (SA Mde) n page FieldFx User s Guide

17 Right Side Panel Cnnectr Descriptin Learn Mre Ethernet cable cnnectr t read trace data using the FieldFx Data Link Sftware and cnnect t the FieldFx remtely. Dwnlad the latest versin f the sftware at: On page 212. IF Out used in SA mde fr external signal prcessing. On page 97. Frequency Reference Surce Output Trigger Output reserved fr future develpment. On page 209. Secure Digital slt. Use t extend the memry f the FieldFx. File lcatins n page 190 Reserved fr future use. Tw standard USB cnnectrs used t cnnect a pwer sensr fr Pwer Meter Mde. Als used t save files t a USB flash drive. Use f Keybard and Muse is NOT supprted. File lcatins n page 190 Left Side Panel Captin Descriptin Learn Mre Audi utput jack fr use with SA Mde Tune and Listen. On page 92 DC Vltage Surce fr use with external DC Bias. On page 210 DC pwer cnnectr used t cnnect t the AC/DC adapter. Maximum: 19 VDC, 4 ADC. On page 11 Preparing fr Initial Use f Yur New FieldFx 17

18 Screen Tur Captin Descriptin Learn Mre n Page: 1 Title write yur wn text here Current Mde 3 Run / Hld Display Frmat Mde dependent 5 Scale/divisin Mde dependent 6 Calibratin Status (CAT and NA) 64 Detectin Methd (SA) 7 Velcity Factr (Fault Meas) 33 8 Averaging Status and Cunt Mde dependent 9 Data / Mem Display (CAT and NA) 187- Trace Math Step / FFT (SA) 92 - Res BW 10 Reslutin Setting Mde dependent 11 Measurement Start Freq r Distance Mde dependent 12 Bandpass / Lwpass setting (Fault Meas) 33 IF BW in NA Mde 13 Output Pwer Level (CAT and NA) Measurement Stp Freq r Distance Mde dependent 15 Actual Sweep Time Mde dependent 16 Limit Line Status Time and Date Marker Readut Battery Status Measurement Type (CAT and NA) 21 Reference Level Mde dependent 22 Reference Psitin Mde dependent 18 FieldFx User s Guide

19 Hw t Enter Numeric Values Many settings n the FieldFx require the entry f numeric values. Hw t enter numeric values Use any cmbinatin f the fllwing keys: Numeric 0 9 keys, alng with the plarity ( +/-) key. Up/Dwn arrw keys t increment r decrement values. Rtary knb t scrll thrugh a set f values. Back erases previusly entered values. Esc exits data entry withut accepting the new value. T cmplete the setting: Press Enter r a different sftkey r hardkey. Multiplier Abbreviatins Many times after entering numeric values, a set f multiplier r suffix sftkeys are presented. The fllwing explains the meaning f these abbreviatins. Select Frequency multipliers as fllws: GHz Gigahertz (1e9 Hertz) MHz Megahertz (1e6 Hertz) khz Kilhertz (1e3 Hertz) Hz Hertz Select Time multipliers as fllws: s Secnds ms millisecnds (1e 3) us micrsecnds (1e 6) ns nansecnds (1e 9) ps picsecnds (1e-12) Preparing fr Initial Use f Yur New FieldFx 19

20 CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mde CAT Mde is typically used t test an entire transmissin system, frm the transmitter t the antenna. This prcess is smetimes referred t as Line Sweeping. CAT Mde is similar t NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde. Learn mre in the Supplemental Online Help: CAT Mde Distance t Fault measurements are discussed n page 30. In this Chapter Measurement Selectin Quick Settings Frequency Range Scale Settings Averaging Single/Cntinuus Reslutin Sweep Time Output Pwer Interference Rejectin Cupled Frequency Prcedures Return Lss Measurement Prt Cable Lss Measurement Prt Insertin Lss Measurement Distance t Fault Measurements See Als All abut Calibratin Set Markers Use Limit Lines Use Trace Math Making 75Ω (hm) Measurements at the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: 20 FieldFx User s Guide

21 CAT Mde Settings Select CAT Mde befre making any setting in this chapter. Hw t select CAT Mde Press Mde. Then CAT. Measurement Selectin Hw t select a CAT Mde Measurement Learn mre abut the fllwing measurements in the Supplemental Online Help: Press Measure 1. Then chse ne f the fllwing: These sftkeys als appear after CAT Mde is selected. Distance t Fault 1-prt reflectin measurement that uses Inverse Furier Transfrm (IFT) calculatins t determine and display the distance t, and relative size f, a fault r disruptin in the transmissin line. Units are in return lss frmat, expressed as a psitive number in db, unless the measurement selected is DTF (VSWR). Learn mre abut DTF Measurements n page 30. Return Lss & DTF Displays bth a Return Lss measurement and a DTF measurement. Use this frmat t display the frequency settings that are used t make the DTF measurement. The frequency range settings fr these tw measurements can be cupled r uncupled. Learn mre n page 27. Calibratins are applied t bth traces. When in Hld mde and Single sweep is perfrmed, nly the active trace is triggered. Use the arrws t activate a trace. Return Lss 1-prt reflectin measurement that displays the amunt f incident signal energy MINUS the amunt f energy that is reflected. The higher the trace is n the screen, the mre energy being reflected back t the FieldFx. Learn hw t measure Return Lss n page 25. VSWR (Vltage Standing Wave Rati als knwn as SWR) 1-prt reflectin measurement that displays the rati f the maximum reflected vltage ver the minimum reflected vltage. The higher the trace is n the screen, the mre energy being reflected back t the FieldFx. DTF (VSWR) Distance t Fault in VSWR frmat. Cable Lss (1-Prt) 1-prt reflectin measurement that displays the lss f a transmissin line. Learn mre n page 25. CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mde 21

22 Insertin Lss (2-Prt) 2-prt transmissin measurement that accurately displays the lss thrugh a cable r ther device in db. Bth ends f the cable must be cnnected t the FieldFx. NO phase infrmatin is included in this measurement. Learn mre n page 29. This feature is available nly with an ptin n sme FieldFx mdels. Fr detailed infrmatin, please view the FieldFx Cnfiguratin Guide at: DTF (Lin) Distance t Fault in Linear frmat. Quick Settings Table Bth CAT and NA Mdes allw yu t view and change mst relevant settings frm a single lcatin. All f these settings are discussed in this chapter and, unless therwise nted, ALL f these settings can als be made using the standard sftkey menus. Hw t view and change Quick Settings Press Meas Setup 4. Then Settings. Press Next Page and Previus Page t view all settings. If these sftkeys are NOT available, then all available settings fit n ne page. T change a setting: Use the arrws t highlight a setting. Then press Edit. The current setting changes t yellw. Sme settings require yu t press a sftkey t change the value. Otherwise, use the numeric keypad, arrws, r rtary knb t change the value. When finished changing a value, press Dne Edit. Press Dck Windw t relcate the Settings table t a psitin relative t the trace windw. The Dck Windw setting persists thrugh a Preset. Chse frm the fllwing: Full (Default setting) Only the Settings table is shwn n the screen. The trace windw is temprarily nt shwn. Left The Settings table is shwn t the left f the trace windw. Bttm The Settings table is shwn belw the trace windw. When finished changing ALL settings, press Dne t save yur settings. Frequency Range Set the range f frequencies ver which yu wuld like t make CAT Mde measurements. When the frequency range is changed after a calibratin is perfrmed, the cal becmes interplated. Learn mre n page 77. Hw t set Frequency Range Press Freq/Dist. 22 FieldFx User s Guide

23 Then chse frm the fllwing: Start and Stp frequencies - beginning and end f the sweep. Center and Span frequencies the center frequency and span f frequencies (half n either side f center). Fllw each setting by entering a value using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. After using the keypad, select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. After using the arrws r the rtary knb, press Enter. The amunt f frequency increment is based n the current span and can NOT be changed in CAT Mde. Scale Settings Adjust the Y-axis scale t see the relevant prtins f the data trace. The Y-axis is divided int 10 graticules. This setting can be changed at any time withut affecting calibratin accuracy. Hw t set Scale Press Scale / Amptd. Then chse frm the fllwing three methds: 1. Autscale Autmatically adjusts the Y-axis t cmfrtably fit the Min and Max amplitude f the trace n the screen. 2. Set Scale, Reference Level, and Reference Psitin: Scale Manually enter a scale per divisin t view specific areas f the trace. Ref Level Manually set the value f the reference line. Enter a negative value by pressing Run/Hld (+/-) either befre r after typing a value. Ref Psitin Manually set the psitin f the reference line. Values must be between 0 (TOP line) and 10 (BOTTOM line) 3. Set Tp and Bttm graticule values. The scale per divisin is calculated. Tp t set the value f the Tp graticule. Bttm t set the value f the Bttm graticule. Enter a negative value by pressing Run/Hld (+/-) either befre r after typing a value. Scale anntatin n the FieldFx screen Reference Line = red arrw Ref Level = -40 db Ref Psitin = 1 Scale = 2 db per divisin CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mde 23

24 Averaging NOTE Trace Averaging helps t smth a trace t reduce the effects f randm nise n a measurement. The FieldFx cmputes each data pint based n the average f the same data pint ver several cnsecutive sweeps. Average Cunt determines the number f sweeps t average; the higher the average cunt, the greater the amunt f nise reductin. An average cunter is shwn in the left edge f the screen as Avg N. This shws the number f previus sweeps that have been averaged tgether t frm the current trace. When the cunter reaches the specified cunt, then a running average f the last N sweeps is displayed. Average Cunt = 1 means there is NO averaging. This setting can be changed at any time withut affecting calibratin accuracy. Averaging is ften used t increase the dynamic range f a measurement. T achieve the highest dynamic range, select NA mde and reduce the IF Bandwidth setting. Learn mre abut dynamic range n page 54. Hw t set Trace Averaging Press BW 2. Then Average N where N is the current cunt setting. Enter a value using the numeric keypad. Enter 1 fr NO averaging. Press Enter. While Trace Averaging is in prcess, press Sweep 3 then Restart t restart the averaging at 1. Single r Cntinuus Measure This setting determines whether the FieldFx sweeps cntinuusly r nly nce each time the Single buttn is pressed. Use Single t cnserve battery pwer r t allw yu t save r analyze a specific measurement trace. This setting can be changed at any time withut affecting calibratin accuracy. Hw t set Single r Cntinuus Press Sweep 3. Then chse ne f the fllwing: Single Autmatically sets Cntinuus OFF and causes FieldFx t make ONE sweep, then hld fr the next Single key press. Hld is anntated in the upper left crner f the display when NOT sweeping, and changes t an arrw --> while the sweep ccurs. Cntinuus Makes cntinuus sweeps. This is the typical setting when battery pwer is nt critical. Yu can als use Run / Hld +/- t tggle between Single and Cntinuus. 24 FieldFx User s Guide

25 Reslutin (Number f Data Pints) Data pints are individual measurements that are made and pltted acrss the X- axis t frm a trace. Select mre data pints t increase measurement reslutin. Hwever, mre data pints require mre time t cmplete an entire measurement sweep. When the Reslutin is changed after a calibratin is perfrmed, the cal becmes interplated. Learn mre n page 77. Hw t set Reslutin Press Sweep 3. Then Reslutin. Then chse ne f the fllwing: Using SCPI, Reslutin can be set t any number f pints between 3 and See the Prgramming Guide at Sweep Time NOTE The fastest pssible sweep time is always used as the default setting. Use the Min Swp Time setting t slw the sweep time when measuring lng lengths f cable. Learn mre in the Supplemental Online Help: The actual sweep time is shwn n the FieldFx screen. See the Screen Tur n page 18. T increase the sweep time, enter a value that is higher than the actual sweep time. The increase will nt be exactly the amunt that yu enter, as the actual sweep time is the cmpsite f many factrs. Measurement speed specificatins d NOT apply in Temperature Cntrl Mde. Learn mre n page 13. Hw t set Sweep Time Press Sweep 3. Then Min Swp Time. Enter a value using the numeric keypad. Press a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Output Pwer Set the pwer level ut f the FieldFx t High, Lw, r manually set pwer level t a value between High and Lw. Generally, the high pwer setting is used when measuring passive, high-lss devices t place the signal farther frm the nise flr. Hwever, fr devices that are sensitive t high pwer levels such as amplifiers, use the Lw pwer setting. Fr best measurement accuracy, use the Manual pwer setting at -15 dbm. After calibratin, the pwer level can be decreased fr amplifiers, r increased fr higher dynamic range. CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mde 25

26 Cautin Pwer Level settings in this mde will NOT change Pwer Level settings in ther mdes. T help prevent damage t yur DUT, use cautin when changing mdes with yur DUT cnnected t the FieldFx test prts. Hw t set Output Pwer Press Meas Setup 4. Then Pwer Then Output Pwer High (Default setting) Sets utput pwer t the maximum achievable pwer at all displayed frequencies. Output pwer is NOT FLAT acrss the displayed FieldFx frequency span. Please see the FieldFx Specificatins (page 232) fr expected pwer levels. Lw Sets utput pwer t apprximately 45 dbm, FLAT acrss the displayed FieldFx frequency span. Man Set utput pwer t an arbitrary value, FLAT acrss the displayed FieldFx frequency span. If flattened pwer can NOT be achieved, a warning message and beep ccurs. T achieve a flattened utput pwer, reduce the pwer level r stp frequency. Then press Pwer Level Then enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter. Interference Rejectin Use this setting when yu suspect that ther signals in the area are interfering with a measurement. Interference may lk like a spike r lack f stability in the measurement trace. While mnitring a measurement at a specific frequency, tggle this setting between ON and OFF. If the measurement result decreases while ON, then there is an interfering signal in the area. Cntinue t make measurements with Interference Rejectin ON. Hwever, this will slw the measurement speed. Once enabled, up t SIX sweeps may be required befre the interfering signal is neutralized. This setting can be changed at any time withut affecting calibratin accuracy. Hw t set Interference Rejectin Press Meas Setup 4. Then Interference Rejectin [current setting]. Then chse frm the fllwing: Off N interference rejectin and fastest pssible sweep speed. Minimum The lwest level f Interference rejectin. Medium The medium level f Interference rejectin. Maximum The highest level f Interference rejectin. 26 FieldFx User s Guide

27 Cupled Frequency This setting, especially useful fr a Return Lss & DTF measurement, allws bth measurements t have different frequency ranges. Hw t set Cupled Frequency With a Return Lss & DTF measurement present: Press Meas Setup 4 Select the DTF measurement (Tr2) using the arrws. Then chse frm the fllwing: Cupled Freq ON - Bth the Return Lss and DTF traces have the same frequency range settings. Cupled Freq OFF (default setting) - Bth traces are allwed t have individual frequency range settings. When set t OFF: The Return Lss measurement frequency settings are made in the usual manner. Learn hw n page 22. When a new Start r Stp frequency is selected, Cupled Frequency is autmatically set t OFF. The DTF measurement is made using the frequencies as determined by the DTF Frequency Mde setting. Learn mre n page 32. Return Lss Measurements Return lss can be thught f as the abslute value f the reflected pwer as cmpared t the incident pwer. When measuring an OPEN r SHORT, all incident pwer is reflected and apprximately 0 db return lss is displayed. When measuring a LOAD, very little pwer is reflected and values f 40 db t 60 db are displayed. The minus sign is usually ignred when cnveying return lss. Fr example, a cmpnent is said t have 18 db return lss, rather than 18 db. Hw t measure Return Lss Cnnect the cable r any adapter used t cnnect the device under test (DUT). Select Preset then Preset Returns the FieldFx t knwn settings. Select Mde then CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Then Return Lss (Default measurement). Press Freq/Dist and enter Start and Stp frequency values f the measurement. Press Meas Setup 4 then Settings t make apprpriate settings befre calibrating. Discnnect the cable r DUT and press Cal 5 then fllw the calibratin prmpts. Recnnect the cable r DUT. The return lss trace is displayed n the FieldFx screen. CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mde 27

28 1-Prt Cable Lss Measurements NOTE While all cables have inherent lss, weather and time will deterirate cables and cause even mre energy t be absrbed by the cable. This makes less pwer available t be transmitted. A deterirated cable is nt usually apparent in a Distance t Fault measurement, where mre bvius and dramatic prblems are identified. A Cable Lss measurement is necessary t measure the accumulated lsses thrughut the length f the cable. A 2-prt Insertin Lss measurement is usually mre accurate than a 1-prt Cable Lss measurement. Hwever, t perfrm a 2-prt Insertin Lss measurement, bth ends f the cable must be cnnected t the FieldFx. In high-lss cnditins, a Cable Lss measurement becmes nisy as the test signal becmes indistinguishable in the FieldFx nise flr. This can ccur when measuring a very lng cable and using relatively high measurement frequencies. T help with this cnditin, use High Pwer (page 25) and Averaging. (page 24). Hw t make a 1-prt Cable Lss Measurement NOTE 1. Press Preset then Preset. 2. Then Mre then Cable Lss (1-Prt). 3. Cnnect the cable t be tested. 4. Press Freq/Dist and enter Start and Stp frequency values f the measurement. 5. Press Sweep 3 then Min Swp Time. Increase the Sweep Time until a stable trace is visible n the screen. The amunt f time that is required increases with lnger cable lengths. Learn mre in the Supplemental Online Help: 6. Remve the cable t be tested. 7. Press Cal 5, then QuickCal r Mechanical Cal. 8. Fllw the prmpts t perfrm calibratin at the end f the jumper cable r adapter. Learn mre abut Calibratin n page Cnnect the cable t be tested. Lw-level standing waves (als knwn as ripple ) which may be visible in reflectin measurements, can hide the actual lss f the cable. Steps 10 thrugh 13 can minimize the ripple. Perfrm the measurement with and withut steps 10 thrugh 13 and chse the methd with the least amunt f ripple. 10. Cnnect a LOAD at the end f the cable t be tested. This limits the reflectins t faults that are lcated in the cable under test. 11. Press Trace 6 then Data->Mem t stre the trace int Memry. 12. Remve the LOAD and leave the end f the cable t be tested pen. 13. Press Data Math then Data Mem. The ripple in the measurement is remved. These minr imperfectins in the cable shuld nt be cnsidered in the Cable Lss measurement. 14. Use Averaging t remve randm nise frm high-lss measurements. Press BW 2 then Average. 28 FieldFx User s Guide

29 The displayed trace shws the Cable Lss values in ne directin thrugh the cable. A Return Lss measurement wuld shw the lss fr bth dwn the cable and back. Therefre, a Cable Lss measurement is the same as a Return Lss measurement divided by 2. The average Cable Lss acrss the specified frequency range is shwn n the screen belw the graticules. 2-Prt Insertin Lss Measurements A 2-prt Insertin Lss measurement is used t measure the lss thrugh a DUT (device under test) r cable ver a specified frequency range. The FieldFx signal surce is transmitted ut the RF OUT cnnectr, thrugh the DUT, and int the RF IN cnnectr. Bth ends f the DUT must be cnnected t the FieldFx, either directly r indirectly using the cable used in the nrmalizatin cal. Insertin lss simply means lss thrugh a device, usually expressed in db. It is exactly the same measurement as S21 Transmissin in NA Mde. 2-prt Insertin Lss measurements are generally mre accurate than 1-prt Cable Lss measurements. Hw t make a 2-prt Insertin Lss Measurement 1. Press Mde then CAT. 2. Then Mre then Insertin Lss (2-Prt). 3. Press Freq/Dist and enter Start and Stp frequency values f the measurement. 4. Press Sweep 3, then select a Reslutin setting. 5. Press Cal 5, then perfrm a calibratin. Learn mre n page Cnnect the DUT and view the insertin lss measurement results. When measuring very lng lengths f cable, it may be necessary t increase the sweep time. Learn hw n page 25. Learn why in the Supplemental Online Help: CAT (Cable and Antenna Test) Mde 29

30 DTF (Distance t Fault) Measurements CAT Mde Distance t Fault (DTF) measurements are generally used t lcate prblems, r faults, in a length f cable r transmissin line. In this chapter, the cable t be tested is referred t as the DUT (Device Under Test). Settings that are NOT unique t DTF measurements are dcumented in the CAT Mde chapter n page 20. In this Chapter Hw t make DTF Measurements DTF Settings Table DTF Measurement (Frmat) DTF Start and Stp Distance Frequency Mde Cupled Frequency Cable (Crrectin) Specificatins Windw Settings DTF Units Calculated DTF Values Abut Alias Faults Optinal settings Markers Limit Lines Save Measurement Settings and Results Trace Math is NOT available in DTF Measurements. Hw t make DTF Measurements Befre starting, yu may need the fllwing: Jumper cable r adapter t cnnect the beginning f the DUT t the FieldFx. 30 FieldFx User s Guide

31 LOAD with crrect cnnectr type and gender t terminate the end f the DUT (if pssible). The knwn length and cable type f the DUT. If the cable type is nt knwn, then the Cable Lss (db/meter) and Velcity Factr f the DUT are required. 1. Cnnect any necessary jumper cable r adapter t the FieldFx RF OUT prt. D NOT cnnect the DUT. 2. Press Preset then Preset t return the FieldFx t the default settings. 3. Then Mde then CAT. 4. Then DTF. 5. Press Freq/Dist, then Stp Distance and enter the length f the DUT. Yu can ptinally set the Start Distance. 6. Press Cal 5 and fllw the Cal prmpts. Learn all abut Calibratin n page Discnnect any cmpnents r antenna that shuld NOT be measured and cnnect a LOAD at the end f the DUT. 8. Press Meas Setup 4 then DTF Cable Specificatins. 9. Either press Recall Cax Cable, r enter the Velcity Factr and Cable Lss f the DUT. 10. Cnnect the start end f the DUT t the FieldFx. 11. Press Meas Setup 4 then Settings then Next Page. If the Alias-free Range setting is False, then yu may see Alias faults n the screen. Learn mre n page 37. DTF Measurement Settings DTF Settings Table Yu can set and view all f the DTF settings, including sme calculated values, n the DTF Settings table. Learn abut the calculated values n page 37. Hw t make settings n the DTF settings table Press Meas Setup 4. Then Settings. Press Next Page and Previus Page t view all settings. T change a setting: Use the arrws r rtary knb t highlight a setting. Numeric settings can be changed by pressing numbers using the numeric keypad. Then press Enter r select a suffix if available. Other settings require yu t press Edit, then press a sftkey t change the value. When finished changing a value, press Dne Edit. Press Dck Windw t relcate the Settings table t a psitin relative t the trace windw. The Dck Windw setting persists thrugh a Preset. Chse frm the fllwing: DTF (Distance t Fault) Measurements 31

32 Full (Default setting) Only the Settings table is shwn n the screen. The trace windw is temprarily nt shwn. Left The Settings table is shwn t the left f the trace windw. Bttm The Settings table is shwn belw the trace windw. When finished changing ALL settings, press Dne t save yur settings. DTF Measurement (Frmat) Yu can select frm 3 different DTF Frmats. Press Measure 1 Then chse frm: Distance t Fault (db) Faults are displayed n the Y-axis in return lss frmat, expressed as a psitive number in db. DTF (VSWR) Faults are displayed n the Y-axis in SWR. Learn mre abut SWR at the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: Mre then DTF Lin Faults are displayed n the Y-axis in linear (unitless) frmat. DTF Start and Stp Distance In DTF measurements, yu set the physical length f cable r ther device t be tested. The FieldFx calculates the frequency range f the measurement frm this distance. The lnger the cable t be tested, the lwer the frequencies that are used. Yu can als set the frequencies manually using the Frequency Mde [Bandpass] setting. Hw t set Start and Stp Distance With a DTF measurement present, press Freq/Dist. Then chse frm the fllwing: Start Distance Enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb, then Enter. By default, the Start Distance is set t 0 Meters. This means that the measurement will display faults starting at the pint at which calibratin standards are cnnected. Stp Distance Enter a value between the start distance and 5 km (r 16,404 ft.) using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb, then Enter. Frequency Mde NOTE All DTF measurements are made with frequency settings and, using Inverse Furier Transfrm (IFT), the time and distance t faults are calculated. The start and stp frequencies fr the measurement are always anntated n the screen belw the start and stp distances. Hw t set Frequency Mde With a DTF measurement present, 32 FieldFx User s Guide

33 Press Meas Setup 4 Then Frequency Mde Chse ne f the fllwing: Lwpass Mde The frequency range f a DTF measurement is set autmatically based n the Start and Stp Distances. Use Lwpass mde when the DUT is a cable ONLY. Bandpass Mde (Default setting) The frequency range f a DTF measurement is set manually. Use Bandpass mde when the DUT cntains a diplexer r ther filtering device which des nt pass sme frequencies. Typically, yu will set the frequency range f the measurement t the passband f the filter. Hwever, yu may als want t test the ability f the filter t reject unwanted frequencies. In this case, set the frequency range t include thse frequencies which the filter may nt be adequately rejecting. When the DTF frequencies are set manually, they may nt be the ptimum frequencies fr measuring the distance t fault. The distance may n lnger be alias-free. Learn mre abut alias-free range n page 37. Hw t manually set Frequencies in Bandpass Mde Press Freq/Dist Then Min Start Freq and type the start frequency t use fr the DTF measurement. Then Max Stp Freq and type the stp frequency t use fr the DTF measurement. OR Press Mre Then Max Freq Span and type the frequency range t use fr the DTF measurement. Then Center Frequency and type the center frequency f the range t use fr the DTF measurement. These settings specify the minimum and maximum frequencies t be used fr the DTF measurement. These exact frequencies may nt be used, but a narrwer frequency range may be used that will still pass thrugh the bandpass filter. Cupled Frequency When a Return Lss & DTF measurement is present, this setting allws yu t have different frequency ranges fr each measurement. Learn mre n page 27. Cable (Crrectin) Specificatins NOTE By default, the FieldFx des NOT crrect DTF measurements t accunt fr the inherent lss f a cable. Hwever, t make mre accurate DTF measurements, the Cable Lss and Velcity Factr values shuld be cnsidered. The fllwing describes Cax Media type. Hwever, yu can create r edit Waveguide Media Standards. Learn hw n page 76. DTF (Distance t Fault) Measurements 33

34 Abut Velcity Factr and Cable Lss Velcity Factr is a prperty f the physical material f a cable. A VF f 1.0 crrespnds t the speed f light in a vacuum, r the fastest VF pssible. A plyethylene dielectric cable has VF = 0.66 and a cable with PTFE dielectric has VF = 0.7. Cable Lss is specified in db/meter. In additin t the length f the cable, lss is als directly prprtinal t the frequency f the signal that passes thrugh the cable. The fllwing is an example shwing hw DTF cable crrectin wrks: The DUT is a 100 meter transmissin cable. The Cable Lss value is.1 db/meter. This means that a signal traveling ONE WAY thrugh the cable will lse 10 db f pwer (100 m *.1dB/m). Because the FieldFx perfrms this measurement with 1 prt, the test signal travels dwn the cable and then back, fr a ttal lss f 20 db. After a calibratin has been perfrmed, fr the purpse f illustrating this pint, cnnect an OPEN t the end f the cable a maximum-sized fault - fr 100% reflectin f the 300 MHz test signal. Withut cmpensatin fr the lss f the cable, a 20 db respnse wuld be visible at 100 meters, which is the OPEN at the end f the DUT. This is frm 10 db f lss thrugh the cable in each directin. With cmpensatin fr the lss using the manufacturer s specificatin, the FieldFx cmpensates the trace as thugh the signal traveling thrugh 100 meters was increased by +20 db. Therefre the respnse will shw 0 db fr 100% reflectin. Hw t enter Cable Lss and Velcity Factr Cable Lss and Velcity factr can be entered using ne f the fllwing methds: Manually enter cable lss and velcity factr fr the measurement. Select r create a cable file which cntains the cable lss and velcity factr. With a DTF measurement present: Press Meas Setup 4. Then DTF Cable Specificatins Select Cable Crr Then: Aut Use Cable Lss and Velcity Factr values frm a Cable file. See Hw t Edit, Save, and Recall a Cable File belw. This will verwrite a manuallyentered value. Man (Default setting) Manually enter a value fr Cable Lss and Velcity Factr. Velcity Factr Using the numeric keypad, enter a value between 0.01 and 1. Then press Enter. Cable Lss Using the numeric keypad, enter a psitive Cable Lss value in db/m, then press Enter. 34 FieldFx User s Guide

35 Hw t Edit a Cable File The FieldFx includes many predefined cable files with the manufacturer s specificatins. Yu can edit these files r create new cable files using the fllwing prcedure r using the FieldFx Data Link Sftware. The Cable crrectin data survives a Mde Preset and Preset. With a DTF measurement present: Press Meas Setup 4 Then DTF Cable Specificatins Then Edit/Save/Recall Cables Press New then Yes t clear all data frm the existing DTF Cable table and reset header infrmatin t default settings. Then Edit Cable t pen the Cable Editr. Then use the arrws t select a field, When editing Cable Descriptin infrmatin, press Edit then mdify the selected field using the FieldFx labeler. When editing Frequency/Lss pairs, enter numbers using the numeric keypad, then select a frequency suffix. Then Enter. Learn mre abut Hw the Freq/Lss pairs are applied belw. Optinally chse frm the fllwing: Previus / Next Page Quickly scrlls thrugh pages f Freq/Lss data. Add Data Add a blank Freq/Lss pair t the table, Delete/Clear then: Delete Line Remve the selected Freq/Lss pair frm the table. Clear All then Yes Remve all Freq/Lss pairs frm the table and resets header infrmatin t default settings. Press Dne t clse the Cable Editr. Hw t Save r Recall a Cable Press Save Cable t saves yur changes t the specified Strage Device. Enter a filename using the FieldFx labeler (learn mre n page 190). Learn mre abut Cable files belw. Press Recall Cable t lad a Cable file frm the specified Strage Device. Strage Device Changes the device used t save r recall Cable files. This is a different setting frm the Save/Recall Strage Device setting. Chse frm Internal (default setting), USB (must be cnnected) r SD card. Abut Cable files Cable files are saved t, and recalled frm, the Cables flder. If the flder des nt already exist n a USB r SD card, it is created autmatically befre string the file. DTF (Distance t Fault) Measurements 35

36 Cable files are stred as *.xml files. Existing cable files that are preladed int the FieldFx firmware can be verwritten. Yur edited file will NOT be verwritten when firmware is updated. Hw the Freq/Lss pairs are applied When the cable file cntains ne Freq/Lss pair, that crrectin value is applied t the entire displayed frequency span. When the cable file cntains tw r mre Freq/Lss pairs, the Lss value that is used is interplated frm the Freq/Lss pairs and the DTF center frequency. Fr example, using a cable file with the fllwing Freq/Lss pairs: 1 GHz: 0.1 db/m 2 GHz: 0.2 db/m The center frequency fr the measurement is determined frm the calculated (Stp Start) frequency values (seen n the secnd page f DTF Settings): Calculated Start = 2.0 MHz Calculated Stp = GHz Center Freq = 1.80 GHz The Lss value fr the measurement is interplated frm the Freq/Lss pairs at the Center Freq: 1 GHz = 0.1 db/m 1.8 GHz = 0.18 db/m 2 GHz = 0.2 db/m The crrectin fr lss at 5 meters in ne directin: 0.18 db/m * 5m = 0.9 db. All DTF measurements crrect fr lss fr travel dwn the DUT and back, s duble the crrectin: 0.9 db * 2 = 1.8 db. Windw Settings Windw settings prvide the ability t chse between ptimizing DTF measurements fr reslving clsely-spaced faults r fr the ability t measure lw-level faults. Hw t select Windw settings Press Meas Setup 4. Then Settings. Then press arrws t mve t the Windw rw. Then press Edit. Then press Windw repeatedly and chse frm the fllwing: Maximum Optimized fr dynamic range, the nise flr is lwered t prvide the ability t measure lw-level respnses. (Default setting) Medium Cmprmise between Min and Max windw settings. Minimum Best Respnse Reslutin, prviding the ability t reslve between tw clsely-spaced respnses. Then press Dne Edit. Again press Dne. 36 FieldFx User s Guide

37 DTF Units The DTF Units setting is available ONLY n the DTF Settings table. By default, X-axis units fr DTF measurement settings are displayed in Meters. Hw t change DTF units With a DTF measurement present, press Freq/Dist. Then DTF Units. The current selectin is underlined m (meters) Feet. Calculated DTF values Press Next Page n the DTF Settings Table t view the fllwing calculated Values nted n the FieldFx screen with c - <setting> Start Frequency Start frequency that is used t calculate DTF. Stp Frequency Stp frequency that is used t calculate DTF. Range Reslutin. Indicates the accuracy f the distance t fault measurement. Fr example, with range reslutin f 500 mm, if the distance t fault is 10 meters, this value culd be inaccurate by +/- 500 mm r between 9.5 t 10.5 meters. This value is calculated frm frequency span / reslutin (pints). Respnse Reslutin, nt displayed, indicates the distance that culd be between tw faults and still shw as separate faults. Learn mre in Windw Settings n page 36. Maximum Distance. The distance that culd be viewed with the current settings. Defined by: Vf*c*Pints/(2*Bandwidth) where: Vf = velcity factr c = speed f light Pints = reslutin Bandwidth = frequency range Alias-free Range (On/Off) On = N Alias images Off = Alias images may appear in the respnse. Abut Alias Faults An alias fault is nt a true device respnse. An alias fault appears because f the methd used t cnvert frequency t time. On the DTF Settings page (abve) the c - Alias-free Range = Off setting indicates alias images MAY appear n the screen. Shrter stp distances (less than 10 meters) and a higher reslutin (1001 pints) will be mre likely t result in Alias-free Range = Off. When the Alias-free Range = Off, the fllwing prcedure will help t determine if a respnse is true r an alias respnse: 1. Put a marker n the respnse in questin and nte the distance t the fault. 2. Change the start r stp distance. DTF (Distance t Fault) Measurements 37

38 A true fault respnse will nt mve in distance. That is, if a true fault is present at 10.3 meters, changing the stp distance frm 15 m t 20 m will nt mve the fault; the fault will remain at 10.3 meters. Hwever, an alias respnse will appear t mve. An un-terminated cable (with NO perfect lad at the end) will shw faults that appear t be beynd the end f the cable. These are NOT alias faults. These faults appear as the signal reflects ff the pen at the end f the cable and travels back dwn the cable tward the cnnectin at the FieldFx. Re-reflectins are measured at the FieldFx as mirrr images f the riginal faults. The largest fault is the pen end f the cable. T avid cnfusin, set the Stp distance shrtly after that fault. 38 FieldFx User s Guide

39 NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde Learn mre abut NA Mde measurements in the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: In this Chapter Hw t Measure S-parameters Mixed-mde measurements Parameter Cnversin Receiver Measurements Multi-Trace Cnfiguratins Quick Settings Calibratin Settings Frmat Frequency Range Scale Settings Electrical Delay Phase Offset Averaging IF Bandwidth Smthing Single/Cntinuus Reslutin (number f pints) Sweep Time Output Pwer System Impedance Prt Extensins Velcity Factr Increase Dynamic Range See Als All abut Calibratin Set Markers Use Limit Lines Use Trace Math Learn hw t make 75Ω (hm) Measurements in the Supplemental Online Help: NA Mde Settings Select NA Mde befre making any setting in this sectin. Hw t select NA Mde Press Mde_. NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde 39

40 Then NA. Abut S-parameters S-parameters (scattering parameters) are used t describe the way a device mdifies a signal. The FieldFx can measure fur S-parameters. The syntax fr each parameter is described by the fllwing: S (ut in) ut = FieldFx receiver prt in = FieldFx surce prt The FieldFx autmatically switches the internal surce and receivers t make bth frward and reverse measurements. Therefre, the FieldFx can measure all fur S-parameters with a single cnnectin. When the surce cmes frm prt 1, the measurement is said t be in the frward directin. When the surce cmes frm prt 2, the measurement is said t be in the reverse directin. S11 and S22 reflectin measurements are used t measure the amunt f reflectins ff the crrespnding DUT prt. Lw reflectins means there is a gd impedance match between the surce and DUT. S21 and S12 transmissin measurements are used t measure the lss r gain thrugh a DUT ver a specified frequency range. Bth ends f the DUT must be cnnected t the FieldFx. The FieldFx signal surce is transmitted ut ne f the test prt cnnectrs, thrugh the DUT, and int the ther test prt cnnectr. Hw t measure S-parameters 1. Press Preset then Preset 2. Press Measure 1 then chse frm the fllwing: S11 Reflectin measurement at prt 1. S21 Frward 2-prt transmissin measurement. S12 Reverse 2-prt transmissin measurement. May require an ptin. S22 Reflectin measurement at prt 2. May require an ptin. OR select a multi-trace cnfiguratin. Learn mre n page Press Freq/Dist then either Start and Stp r Center and Span t enter a Frequency Range fr the measurement. 40 FieldFx User s Guide

41 4. Press BW 2 then IFBW t select the IF Bandwidth fr the measurement. Narrwer bandwidths require mre time t sweep, but lwers trace nise. 5. Press Sweep 3 then Reslutin t select the number f data pints fr the measurement. Mre data pints require mre time t sweep. 6. Press Cal 5 t calibrate the measurement. Learn mre n page All ther settings can be made AFTER calibratin withut cmprmising measurement accuracy. Mixed-Mde S-Parameters NOTE In NA Mde ONLY, mixed-mde S-parameters (als knwn as Balanced measurements) are available with Optin 212. Because the FieldFx has nly tw test prts, nly reflectin measurements are available. Cnnect the balanced input r utput f yur DUT t the FieldFx prts 1 and 2. Fr highest accuracy, a Full 2-prt calibratin is required. All FieldFx settings and features are supprted (except Parameter Cnversin) with mixed-mde S-parameters. Learn mre abut Balanced Measurements with the FieldFx in the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: Hw t make mixed-mde S-parameter measurements Press Measure 1 Then Mre Then chse frm the fllwing: Scc11 Cmmn reflect/cmmn incident fr lgical prt 1 Sdd11 Differential reflect/differential incident fr lgical prt 1 Sdc11 Differential reflect/cmmn incident fr lgical prt 1. Scd11 Cmmn reflect/differential incident fr lgical prt 1. T make balanced reflectin measurements at the DUT utput, cnnect the DUT utput t the FieldFx prts. Parameter Cnversin In NA Mde ONLY, cnverts the active S-parameter trace t an equivalent impedance (Z), admittance (Y), r reciprcal 1/S-parameter. Hw t select parameter cnversins Press Measure 1 Then select an S-parameter Then Mre Then Cnversin Then chse frm the fllwing: Off (default) N cnversin is perfrmed. NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde 41

42 Z Cnv ( -- ) r Y Cnv ( -- ) Perfrm cnversin fr impedance (Z) r admittance (Y). Then chse frm the fllwing fr either: Aut The displayed S-parameter is cnverted t the apprpriate Z r Y parameter: Refl fr S11 and S22; Trans fr S21 and S12. When the S- parameter is changed, the apprpriate cnversin changes autmatically. Refl The displayed S-parameter is cnverted t Z r Y reflectin, regardless f whether the S-parameter is reflectin (S11 r S22) r transmissin (S21 r S12). Trans The displayed S-parameter is cnverted t Z r Y transmissin, regardless f whether the S-parameter is reflectin (S11 r S22) r transmissin (S21 r S12). 1/S The displayed S-parameter is cnverted t 1/S-parameter. Receiver Measurements NOTE In NA Mde ONLY, yu can make unratied, uncrrected receiver measurements. These measurements are typically used as diagnstic tls fr service persnnel. Receiver measurements are NOT crrected fr abslute pwer. They are nly useful fr making relative measurements. The Y-Axis and markers are labeled in db - NOT dbm. Specifically, R1 and R2, d NOT indicate the actual pwer levels ut f the surce prts. Hw t make receiver measurements Press Measure 1 Then Advanced Then chse frm the fllwing: A Prt-1 test prt (*1) B Prt-2 test prt (*2) R1 Prt-1 reference receiver (*1) R2 Prt-2 reference receiver (*2) (* ) indicates the Aut-selected surce prt fr the measurement Surce Prt The FieldFx prt t prvide the surce signal. Chse frm the fllwing: Aut The FieldFx sets the surce prt based n the selected receiver. Prt 1 Select when measuring transmissin at B receiver. Prt 2 Select when measuring reverse transmissin at A receiver. Learn mre abut Raw Receiver Measurements at the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: Multi-Trace Cnfiguratins In NA Mde yu can display multiple traces n the FieldFx screen. 42 FieldFx User s Guide

43 An x3h cnfiguratin. Tr2 is the ACTIVE trace as indicated by the highlighted Tr 2 Trace Setting Ntes The Frequency Range, IF BW, Reslutin, Average, and Output Pwer settings are cmmn fr all displayed traces. All ther trace settings, such as measurement, frmat, and limit lines, are applied individually t the ACTIVE trace in the same manner as when a single trace is present. By default, a marker is created n ALL traces as shwn in the abve image. Hwever, they can be created individually by disabling Cupled Markers. Learn mre n page 177. Hw t select a multi-trace cnfiguratin Press Trace 6 Then Num Traces Then chse frm the fllwing: The default measurements depend n the ptins that are installed. x1 x2 1 trace standard cnfiguratin 2 traces verlayed n a single graticule x2h 2 traces n separate hrizntal graticules x3h 3 traces n separate hrizntal graticules X3 x4 3 traces verlayed n a single graticule 4 traces n separate graticules NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde 43

44 Hw t activate a trace in rder t change a setting Use the arrws OR Press Trace 6 then select Trace 1, Trace 2, Trace 3, r Trace 4, Only traces that are shwn can be activated. Hw t maximize the viewing f the active trace Press System 7 Then Full Screen. Press any key t return t the standard display. Quick Settings Bth CAT and NA Mdes allw yu t view and change mst relevant settings frm a single lcatin. All f these settings are discussed in this chapter and, unless therwise nted, ALL f these settings can als be made using the standard sftkey menus. Hw t view and change Quick Settings Press Meas Setup 4. Then Settings. Press Next Page and Previus Page t view all settings. If these sftkeys are NOT available, then all available settings fit n ne page. T change a setting: Use the arrws t highlight a setting. Then press Edit. The current setting changes t yellw. Sme settings require yu t press a sftkey t change the value. Otherwise, use the numeric keypad, arrws, r rtary knb t change the value. When finished changing a value, press Dne Edit. Press Dck Windw t relcate the Settings table t a psitin relative t the trace windw. The Dck Windw setting persists thrugh a Preset. Chse frm the fllwing: Full (Default setting) Only the Settings table is shwn n the screen. The trace windw is temprarily nt shwn. Left The Settings table is shwn t the left f the trace windw. Bttm The Settings table is shwn belw the trace windw. When finished changing ALL settings, press Dne t save yur settings. Calibratin Settings NA Mde has a page specifically fr making settings that pertain t Prt Extensins, including Velcity Factr and Media Type. Learn mre abut Prt Extensins n page 52. Learn mre abut Media Type in Waveguide Calibratins n page FieldFx User s Guide

45 Hw t view and change Calibratin Settings Press Meas Setup 4. Then Calibratin Settings Make these settings in the same manner as Quick Settings in the previus sectin. Frmat NOTE Select the display frmat in which t present measurement results. This setting can be changed at any time withut affecting calibratin accuracy. Learn mre abut Display Frmats in the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: The marker nscreen readut can be changed t frmats ther than the display frmat. Learn hw t set marker frmat n page 179. Hw t select a NA Frmat Press Measure 1. Then Frmat [current setting]. Then chse frm the fllwing: Lg Magnitude Displays magnitude in db Linear Displays psitive values nly. Y-axis: Unitless (U) fr ratied measurements; Watts (W) fr unratied measurements. VSWR Used mainly fr S11 and S22. Displays unitless reflectin data. Phase Displays phase in degrees. The trace wraps every 360 degrees, frm +180 t 180, fr easy scaling. Smith Used mainly fr S11 and S22. Displays series resistance and reactance. Mre then Plar Used mainly fr S11 and S22. Displays magnitude and phase f the reflectin cefficient. Grup Delay Used mainly fr S21 and S12. Displays signal transmissin (prpagatin) time thrugh a device in secnds. The Grup Delay aperture is the current Smthing aperture. Default is 1.5 % f the X-axis. Learn hw t set Smthing aperture n page 49. Learn mre abut Grup Delay measurements at the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: Unwrap Phase Same as Phase, but withut 180 degree wrapping. NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde 45

46 NOTE Phase is unwrapped by cmparing the phase frm ne data pint t the next. If the phase difference between tw data pints is greater than 180 degrees, r if the phase f the first data pint is greater than 180 degrees frm DC, than the phase measurement is prbably NOT accurate. T ensure that the phase measurement is accurate, increase the reslutin setting. When making a narrwband measurement, reduce the start frequency fr the unwrapped phase measurement t ensure the first data pint is less than 180 degrees frm DC. Frequency Range Set the range f frequencies ver which yu wuld like t make measurements. When the frequency range is changed after a calibratin is perfrmed, the cal becmes interplated. Learn mre n page77. Hw t set Frequency Range This can be dne in tw ways: Press Freq/Dist Then chse frm the fllwing: Start and Stp frequencies Specify the beginning and end f the sweep. Center and Span frequencies - Specify the center frequency and span f frequencies (half n either side f center). Fllw each by entering a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. After using the arrws r the rtary knb, press Enter. The increment setting f the arrws is based n the current span and can NOT be changed in NA Mde. After using the keypad, select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Scale Settings Adjust the Y-axis scale t see the relevant prtins f the data trace. The Y-axis is divided int 10 graticules. This setting can be changed at any time withut affecting calibratin accuracy. Hw t set Scale Press Scale / Amptd. Then chse frm the fllwing methds: 1. Autscale Autmatically adjusts the Y-axis t cmfrtably fit the Min and Max amplitude f the trace n the screen. 2. Autscale All Autscales all f the traces n the screen, useful nly fr multi-trace cnfiguratins. 3. Set Scale, Reference Level, and Reference Psitin Scale Manually enter a scale per divisin t view specific areas f the trace. Ref Level Manually set the value f the reference line. Enter a negative value by pressing Run/Hld (+/-) either befre r after typing a value. 46 FieldFx User s Guide

47 Ref Psitin Manually set the psitin f the reference line. Values must be between 0 (TOP line) and 10 (BOTTOM line) Scale anntatin n the FieldFx screen Reference Line = red arrw Ref Level = 40 db Ref Psitin = 1 Scale = 2 db per divisin Electrical Delay Electrical delay is a mathematical functin that simulates a variable length f lssless transmissin line. Use the electrical delay feature t cmpensate fr the linear phase shift thrugh a device and view nly the deviatin frm linear phase f the device. Yu can set the electrical delay independently fr each measurement trace. T apply an electrical delay t all measurement traces, use Prt Extensins. Learn hw n page 52. Learn hw t set Phase frmats n page 44. Hw t set Electrical Delay Press Scale / Amptd Then Mre Then Electrical Delay Enter a time value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Electrical Delay can als be set using the Mkr->Delay feature. Learn hw n page 183. Phase Offset Phase ffset mathematically adjusts the phase measurement by a specified amunt, up t 360. Use this feature in the fllwing ways: Imprve the display f a phase measurement. This is similar t the way yu wuld change the reference level in an amplitude measurement. Change the phase respnse t center r align the respnse n the screen. Emulate a prjected phase shift in yur measurement. Fr example, if yu knw that yu need t add a cable and that the length f that cable will add a certain phase shift t yur measurement, yu can use phase ffset t add that amunt and simulate the cmplete device measurement. Yu can set the phase ffset independently fr each measurement trace. Hw t set Phase Offset Press Scale / Amptd NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde 47

48 Then Mre Then Phase Offset Enter a value in degrees using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter Averaging Averaging helps t reduce the effects f randm nise n a measurement. Yu specify the number f measurements t be averaged. The mre measurements averaged, the greater the amunt f nise reductin. An average cunter is shwn in the left edge f the screen as Avg <n> where <n> is the number f measurements that are averaged. Averaging can be set befre r after calibratin. When set befre calibratin, each calibratin standard is measured <n> times and averaged. Mre time is needed t perfrm the calibratin, but there will be less nise in the resulting errr terms which means that subsequent measurements will als have less nise. In additin, nise is further reduced by cntinuing t average after calibratin. Hw t set Averaging Press BW 2. Then Average <n> where <n> is the number f measurements t average. Enter a value using the numeric keypad. Enter 1 fr NO averaging. Press Enter. Then Average Mde Chse frm the fllwing: Sweep - Each data pint is based n the average f the same data pint being measured ver <n> cnsecutive sweeps. The average cunter shws the number f previus sweeps that have been averaged tgether t frm the current trace. When the cunter reaches the specified cunt, then a running average f the last <n> sweeps is displayed. Pint - Each data pint is measured <n> times and averaged befre ging t the next data pint. On subsequent sweeps, averaging restarts by measuring each data pint again <n> times. The average cunter is nt updated because data is nt displayed until all the averages have been applied. Pint averaging is usually faster than sweep averaging. Hwever, yu may need t increase the Pint Average cunt t btain the same level f nise reductin as with sweep averaging. While averaging is in prcess, press Sweep 3 then Restart t restart the averaging at 1. IF Bandwidth The FieldFx cnverts the received signal frm its surce t a lwer intermediate frequency (IF). The bandwidth f the IF bandpass filter is adjustable. Reducing the IF receiver bandwidth reduces the effect f randm nise n a measurement. Hwever, narrwer IF bandwidths cause lnger sweep times. 48 FieldFx User s Guide

49 Hw t set IF BW Press BW 2. Then IF BW Then chse frm the fllwing: 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 khz 10 khz 100 khz Mre 30 Hz 300 Hz 3 khz 30 khz Smthing Trace smthing averages a number f adjacent data pints t smth the peakt-peak nise values n a displayed trace. The number f adjacent data pints that are averaged is knwn as the smthing aperture. Aperture is set by specifying a percentage f the X-axis span. Trace smthing des NOT significantly increase measurement time. Smthing is used in Grup Delay measurements, althugh it can be used with any NA frmat EXCEPT Plar r Smith Chart. Learn mre abut NA Mde frmats, including Grup Delay, n page 44. When enabled, Sm appears n the FieldFx screen. Hw t set Smthing Press BW 2. Then Smthing ON OFF Then Sm. Aperture and enter a value between 0 and 25 (percent) using the numeric keypad. Press Enter Single r Cntinuus Measure This setting determines whether the FieldFx sweeps cntinuusly r nly nce each time the Single buttn is pressed. Use Single t cnserve battery pwer r t allw yu t save r analyze a specific measurement trace. This setting can be changed at any time withut affecting calibratin accuracy. Hw t set Single r Cntinuus Press Sweep 3. Then chse ne f the fllwing: Single Autmatically sets Cntinuus OFF and causes FieldFx t make ONE sweep, then hld fr the next Single key press. Hld is anntated in the upper left crner f the display when NOT sweeping, and changes t an arrw --> while the sweep ccurs. Cntinuus Makes cntinuus sweeps. This is the typical setting when battery pwer is nt critical. Yu can als use Run / Hld +/- t tggle between Single and Cntinuus. NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde 49

50 Reslutin (Number f Data Pints) Data pints are individual measurements that are made and pltted acrss the X- axis t frm a trace. Select mre data pints t increase measurement reslutin. Hwever, mre data pints als takes mre time t cmplete an entire measurement sweep. When the Reslutin is changed after a calibratin is perfrmed, the cal becmes interplated. Learn mre n page 77. Hw t set Reslutin Press Sweep 3. Then Reslutin. Then chse frm the fllwing: Using SCPI, Reslutin can be set t ANY number f pints between 3 and See the Prgramming Guide at Sweep Time NOTE The fastest pssible sweep time is always used as the default setting. Use the Min Swp Time setting t slw the sweep time when measuring lng lengths f cable. Learn mre at the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: The actual sweep time is shwn n the FieldFx screen. See the Screen Tur n page 18. T increase the sweep time, enter a value that is higher than the actual sweep time. The increase will nt be exactly the amunt that yu enter, as the actual sweep time is the cmpsite f many factrs. Measurement speed specificatins d NOT apply in Temperature Cntrl Mde. Learn mre n page 13. Hw t set Sweep Time Press Sweep 3. Then Min Swp Time. Enter a value using the numeric keypad. Press a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Triggering External triggering (NA and SA mdes ONLY) allws yu t initiate a sweep when an external DC vltage is sensed at the Ref In/Trig In cnnectr n the FieldFx tp panel. See External Triggering fr SA Mde n page 100. Trigger Surce Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Then Trig Surce Then chse frm the fllwing: 50 FieldFx User s Guide

51 Internal Sweeps are initiated by the FieldFx internal circuitry. When Sweep is set t Cntinuus, a new sweep begins autmatically when the previus sweep ends. External A sweep is initiated n the rising r falling edge f an external TTL signal at the Ref In/Trig In cnnectr n the FieldFx tp panel. When the FieldFx is armed fr an external trigger signal, Wait is anntated n the display. A sweep can NOT be initiated by an external signal while a sweep is in prgress. A sweep can NOT be initiated by an external signal when in HOLD mde. Learn mre abut HOLD mde n page 49. Trigger Slpe Determines which edge f an External trigger signal initiates a sweep. Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Then Trig Slpe Then chse frm the fllwing: Psitive Sweep is initiated by the rising edge f signal at abut 1.7 V. Negative Sweep is initiated by the falling edge f signal at abut 1.0 V. Output Pwer Cautin Set the pwer level ut f the FieldFx t High, Lw, r manually set pwer level t a value between High and Lw. Generally, the high pwer setting is used when measuring passive, high-lss devices t place the signal farther frm the nise flr. Hwever, fr devices that are sensitive t high pwer levels such as amplifiers, use the Lw pwer setting. Fr best measurement accuracy, use the Manual pwer setting at -15 dbm. After calibratin, the pwer level can be decreased fr amplifiers, r increased fr higher dynamic range. Pwer Level settings in this mde will NOT change Pwer Level settings in ther mdes. T help prevent damage t yur DUT, use cautin when changing mdes with yur DUT cnnected t the FieldFx test prts. Hw t set Output Pwer Press Meas Setup 4. Then Output Pwer High Sets utput pwer t the maximum achievable pwer at all displayed frequencies. Output pwer is NOT FLAT acrss the displayed FieldFx frequency span. Please see the FieldFx Specificatins (see page 232) fr expected pwer levels. Lw Sets utput pwer t apprximately 45 dbm, FLAT acrss the displayed FieldFx frequency span. NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde 51

52 Man (default setting at -15 dbm) Set utput pwer t an arbitrary value, FLAT acrss the displayed FieldFx frequency span. If flattened pwer can NOT be achieved, a warning message and beep ccurs. T achieve a flattened utput pwer, reduce the pwer level r stp frequency. Then press Pwer Level Then enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter. System Impedance (Z0) T accurately view data presented in Smith Chart frmat, first set the System Impedance. Learn hw t select Smith Chart frmat n page 44. Learn hw t make 75Ω measurements at the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: Hw t set System Impedance Press Meas Setup 4. Then Settings. Then scrll t System Z0 and press Edit Then type either 50 r 75 and press Enter Prt Extensins NOTE Prt extensins allw yu t electrically mve the calibratin reference plane n either prt 1 r prt 2 after yu have perfrmed a calibratin. FieldFx analyzers d NOT supprt prt extensins fr waveguide cmpnent measurements. Why use Prt Extensins Use prt extensins if yu are unable t perfrm a calibratin directly at yur device because the lcatin is nt accessible. Perfrm a calibratin at a cnvenient place, then use prt extensins t cmpensate fr the time delay (phase shift) t the desired reference plane. On the FieldFx, prt extensins des nt cmpensate fr the lss f the additinal electrical length, nr any mismatch errrs beynd the calibratin reference plane. Als use prt extensins if yu have already perfrmed a calibratin, and then decide that yu need t add a length f transmissin line in the measurement cnfiguratin. Use prt extensins t "tell" the FieldFx that yu have added the length t a specific prt.. With S11 and S22 reflectin measurements, the FieldFx dubles the prt extensin valued that yu enter t accunt fr the additinal delay in the frward and reverse directins. With S21 and S12 transmissin measurements, the prt 1 and prt 2 extensins are added tgether. This accunts fr the ttal transmissin delay ging thrugh prts 1 and FieldFx User s Guide

53 Prt extensins and Electrical Delay differ in the fllwing ways: Electrical delay applies t a specific trace Prt extensins apply t specific hardware prts Prt Extensins and Electrical Delay can be set independently. When bth are set, the delay adds tgether. Learn mre abut Electrical Delay n page 47. Hw t apply Prt Extensins Press Meas Setup 4. Then Prt Extensins Then Prt Extensins ON Then Prt1 Extensin Then enter time value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter r select a secnds (time) multiplier. Yu can als set Prt Extensins by pressing Meas Setup 4 then Calibratin (settings). While setting Prt Extensin, the physical length f the extensin, at the current Velcity Factr setting, is visible t the right (red bx in abve image). Velcity Factr The electrical delay r prt extensin value is entered as delay, r electrical length, in units f time. Entering the velcity factr causes the FieldFx t accurately display the equivalent physical length in meters (NOT available in feet) that crrespnds t the entered electrical delay. Velcity factr is the rati f the velcity f wave prpagatin in a caxial cable t the velcity f wave prpagatin in free space. This velcity depends n the relative permittivity f the cable dielectric ( r). Velcity factr = 1/sqrt(εr) VF = 0.66 crrespnds t wave prpagatin thrugh a plyethylene dielectric. VF = 1.0 (default setting) crrespnds t wave prpagatin thrugh free space (a vacuum). Hw t set Velcity Factr Press Meas Setup 4. Then Prt Extensins Then Velcity Factr Then enter a value between 0.1 and 1 using the numeric keypad, then press Enter. NA (Netwrk Analyzer) Mde 53

54 Yu can als set Velcity Factr by pressing Meas Setup 4 then Calibratin (settings). Increase Dynamic Range Dynamic range is the difference between maximum input pwer t the FieldFx receiver (withut cmpressing the receiver), and the minimum measurable pwer (nise flr). Measurement accuracy is increased when the DUT respnse is at least 10 db abve the nise flr. Fr a measurement t be valid, input signals must be within these bundaries. The fllwing settings will increase the dynamic range f yur NA mde measurement. Increase Pwer Level: Press Meas 4 then Output Pwer High Lwer the IFBW: Press BW 2 then IF BW Increase Averaging: Press BW 2 then Average The fllwing prcedure MAY increase the dynamic range f yur NA mde measurement. The results yu see will depend n the perfrmance f yur DUT. With an S21 trace active: 1. With RF OUT (prt-2) pen, press Trace 6 then Math and Memry then Data->Mem 2. Re-cnnect the DUT. 3. Press Data Math then Data-Mem 54 FieldFx User s Guide

55 Time Dmain - Optin 010 With NA Mde, Time Dmain (Opt 010), frequency infrmatin is used t calculate and display measurements with time as the hrizntal display axis. The respnse values appear separated in time allwing a different perspective f the test device's perfrmance and limitatins. NA Mde settings that are NOT unique t Time Dmain are dcumented in the NA Mde chapter n page 39. In this Chapter Overview Time Dmain (Transfrm) Settings Transfrm Settings Table Frequency Range and Pints Stimulus (Mde) Set Frequency Lwpass Start/Stp Time Distance Units Windw Layut Transfrm Windw Line Lss and Velcity Factr Data Chain Trace Settings Transfrm Enable Gating Enable Gating Settings Start, Stp, Center, and Span Gate Times Gating Type Overview In nrmal NA Mde peratin, the FieldFx measures the characteristics f a test device as a functin f frequency. With Time Dmain (pt 010), frequency infrmatin is used t calculate the inverse Furier transfrm and display measurements with time n the hrizntal display axis. The respnse values appear separated in time, allwing a different perspective f the test device's perfrmance and limitatins. The graphic belw cmpares the same cable reflectin measurement data in bth the frequency and time dmain. The cable has tw bends. Each bend creates a mismatch r change in the line impedance. Time Dmain - Optin

56 The frequency dmain f an S11 measurement shws reflectins caused by mismatches in the cable. It is impssible t determine where the mismatches physically ccur in the cable. The Time Dmain respnse shws bth the lcatin and the magnitude f each mismatch. The respnses indicate that the secnd cable bend is the lcatin f a significant mismatch. This mismatch can be gated ut, allwing yu t view the frequency dmain respnse as if the mismatch were nt present. Learn mre abut gating n page 61. Markers that are created n a Time Dmain trace can be used t pinpint the distance f the mismatch frm the reference plane. Fr mre infrmatin n Time Dmain thery, see Time Dmain (Transfrm) Settings Yu can set and view mst f the Time Dmain settings n the Transfrm Settings table. Transfrm Settings Table The fllwing settings are listed in the rder they appear n the Transfrm Settings menu selectin. Hw t make settings n the Transfrm settings table Press Meas Setup 4. Then Transfrm Then Transfrm Settings. Press Next Page and Previus Page t view all settings. T change a setting: Use the arrws r rtary knb t highlight a setting. Numeric settings can be changed by pressing numbers using the numeric keypad. Then press Enter r select a suffix if available. Sme settings allw yu t press Edit t tggle the value. Other settings require that yu then press a sftkey t change the value. When finished changing a value, press Dne Edit. Press Dck Windw t relcate the Settings table t a psitin relative t the trace windw. The Dck Windw setting persists thrugh a Preset. Chse frm the fllwing: Full (Default setting) Only the Settings table is shwn n the screen. The trace windw is temprarily nt shwn. 56 FieldFx User s Guide

57 Left The Settings table is shwn t the left f the trace windw. Bttm The Settings table is shwn belw the trace windw. When finished changing ALL settings, press Dne t save yur settings. Frequency Range and Pints Like CAT mde, all Time Dmain measurements are made in the frequency dmain and, using Inverse Furier Transfrm (IFT), time is calculated. Select the frequency range frm which Time Dmain measurements are calculated. Increasing the data pints will imprve measurement reslutin. Hwever, mre data pints will usually result in slwer sweep updates. Set frequency range and pints befre selecting Stimulus Mde. Stimulus (Mde) There are three variatins n hw the Time Dmain transfrm algrithm is applied t the frequency dmain measurement. Each methd has a unique applicatin. Lwpass Impulse - Highest reslutin. Mst useful fr seeing small respnses in devices that pass lw frequencies, such as cables. Lwpass Step - Easiest t identify inductive and capacitive discntinuities in devices that pass lw frequencies such as cables. In bth Lwpass mdes, frequencies dwn t DC and negative frequencies are extraplated. Therefre, when either Lwpass mde is selected, Set Freq.Lw Pass is autmatically applied t adjust the start frequency. Learn mre abut Set Frequency Lwpass belw. When the Start Frequency r reslutin is changed AFTER selecting a Lwpass mde, then Stimulus mde is set t Band Pass and Transfrm is disabled. Band pass- Easiest methd - can be used with any frequency sweep. Mst useful fr measuring band limited devices such as filters and DC blcked cables. This mde des NOT shw capacitive and inductive reactance. Fr the same frequency span and number f pints, band pass mde has twice the impulse width, which hides clsely spaced respnses degrading the respnse reslutin. Set Frequency Lwpass NOTE This setting is made autmatically when either Lwpass mde is selected. USE ONLY IN LOW PASS MODES. When this setting is made, the start frequency is adjusted t be harmnics f the start frequency. Start frequency is cmputed by the fllwing frmula: Lw Pass Start Frequency = Stp Frequency / Number f pints. Start/Stp Time The fllwing settings adjust the display reslutin, allwing yu t zm IN r OUT n a respnse. When the start r stp time is updated, they may be autmatically adjusted t limit the display t ne alias-free respnse n either side f zer time. Time Dmain - Optin

58 Hw t set Start and Stp time Press Measure 4 Then Transfrm Then Transfrm Start Stp Then chse frm: NOTE Start Sets the transfrm start time. Stp Sets the transfrm stp time. Zer (0) secnds is always the calibratin reference plane. Negative values are useful if mving the reference plane. Distance Units When markers are present n a Time Dmain trace, marker X-axis values are shwn bth in units f time (secnds) and distance. Select the units in which the marker distance data is presented. Distance Units are als used when setting Time Dmain Line Lss. Learn mre n page 59. Chse frm: m (meters), r Feet. Windw Layut This setting is used t create additinal traces, r select a new layut fr traces that are already created, Chse frm: x1, x2, x2h, x3h, x4. Learn mre abut multi-trace cnfiguratins n page 42. Transfrm Windw There are abrupt transitins in a frequency dmain measurement at the start and stp frequencies, causing versht and ringing in a Time Dmain respnse. The Windw setting reduces the abruptness f the frequency dmain transitins. This causes yu t make a tradeff in the Time Dmain respnse. The Windw setting applies t ALL traces. 58 FieldFx User s Guide

59 Hw t make Windw setting Press Measure 4 Then Transfrm Then Mre Then Transfrm Windw A settings table appears that allws yu t navigate and select the fllwing settings. These settings are made exactly like thse made n the Transfrm Settings table. Learn hw n page 56. NOTE Any f the fllwing fur methds can be used t make this same Windw setting. Impulse Width values are calculated frm the frequency span and Kaiser Beta value. 1. Windw Min Medium Max 2. Percent Kaiser Beta Impulse Width ps ps ps Line Lss and Velcity Factr By default, the FieldFx des NOT crrect Time Dmain measurements t accunt fr the inherent lss f a cable. Hwever, t make mre accurate measurements, Line Lss and Velcity Factr shuld be cnsidered. Abut Velcity Factr and Line Lss Velcity Factr is a prperty f the physical material f a cable. A VF f 1.0 crrespnds t the speed f light in a vacuum, r the fastest VF pssible. A plyethylene dielectric cable has VF = 0.66 and a cable with PTFE dielectric has VF = 0.7. Line Lss is specified in db/m (r ft). In additin t the length f the cable, lss is als directly prprtinal t the frequency f the signal that passes thrugh the cable. The fllwing is an example shwing hw Line Lss wrks: The DUT is a 100 meter transmissin cable. The Line Lss value is.1 db/meter. This means that a signal traveling ONE WAY thrugh the cable will lse 10 db f pwer (100 m *.1dB/m). Because the FieldFx perfrms this measurement with 1 prt, the test signal travels dwn the cable and then back, fr a ttal lss f 20 db. Fr the purpse f illustrating this pint, cnnect an OPEN t the end f the cable a maximum-sized fault - fr 100% reflectin f the 300 MHz test signal. Withut cmpensatin fr the lss f the cable, a 20 db respnse wuld be visible at 100 meters, which is the OPEN at the end f the DUT. This is frm 10 db f lss thrugh the cable in each directin. Time Dmain - Optin

60 With cmpensatin fr the lss using the manufacturer s specificatin, the FieldFx cmpensates the trace as thugh the signal traveling thrugh 100 meters was increased by +20 db. Therefre the respnse will shw 0 db fr 100% reflectin. Data Chain This setting, available nly n the Transfrm Settings Table, reverts t Standard when the FieldFx is Preset. Chse frm the fllwing: Standard The nrmal FieldFx data prcessing chain. Transfrm calculatins are perfrmed AFTER errr crrectin and trace math The data prcessing chain used by the Agilent 8510 netwrk analyzer. Transfrm calculatins are perfrmed BEFORE errr crrectin and trace math. Learn mre at the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help website: Trace Settings The fllwing tw settings apply t specific traces. Transfrm Enable Enable Time Dmain transfrm fr the specific trace. Select the trace. Press Measure 4 Then Transfrm Then chse frm: On Trace displays Time Dmain data. Off Trace displays frequency dmain data. Gate Enable Enable Gating fr the specific trace. Select the trace. Press Measure 4 Then Transfrm Then chse frm: On Trace displays Time Dmain data. Off Trace displays frequency dmain data. 60 FieldFx User s Guide

61 Gating NOTE Perhaps the mst beneficial feature f Time Dmain transfrm is the Gating functin. When viewing the Time Dmain respnse f a device, the gating functin can be used t "virtually" remve undesired respnses. Yu can then simultaneusly view a frequency dmain trace as if the undesired respnse did nt exist. This allws yu t characterize devices withut the effects f external devices such as cnnectrs r adapters. Gating is best perfrmed while viewing a Time Dmain trace. Then, either disable Transfrm, r separately view a frequency dmain trace t see the trace with the gated effects remved. When a discntinuity in a test device reflects energy, that energy will nt reach subsequent discntinuities. This can "MASK", r hide, the true respnse which wuld have ccurred if the previus discntinuity were nt present. The Gating feature des NOT cmpensate fr this. The fllwing image shws hw gating can affect measurement results. All 4 traces shw the same S11 measurement. Trace 1 shws the frequency respnse withut gating enabled. Trace 2 shws the transfrm respnse withut gating enabled. Trace 3 shws the transfrm respnse with gating enabled. Trace 4 shws the frequency respnse with gating enabled. Hw t make Time Dmain Gating settings Press Measure 4 Then Transfrm Then Gating Then chse frm: On Gating is being perfrmed. Off Gating is NOT being perfrmed. Time Dmain - Optin

62 Start, Stp, Center, and Span Gate Times These settings specify the time in the trace t be gated (in r ut). The gate times can be specified using either Start and Stp r Center and Span. Press Gating Start/Stp A settings table appears that allws yu t navigate and select the fllwing settings. These settings are made exactly like thse made n the Transfrm Settings table. Learn hw n page 56. Gating Type This setting defines the type f filtering that will be perfrmed fr the gating functin. The gate start and stp flags n the display pint tward the part f the trace yu want t keep. Chse frm the fllwing: Bandpass KEEPS the respnses within the Gating Start and Stp times. Ntch REMOVES the respnses within the Gating Start and Stp times. Gating Shape This setting defines the filter characteristics f the gate functin. Chse frm Minimum, Nrmal, Wide, Maximum. Time dmain Gate Shape setting Gate Shape Passband Ripple Sidelbe Levels Cutff Time Minimum Gate Span Minimum 0.1 db -48 db 1.4/Freq Span 2.8/Freq Span Nrmal 0.1 db -68 db 2.8/Freq Span 5.6/Freq Span Wide 0.1 db -57 db 4.4/Freq Span 8.8/Freq Span Maximum 0.01 db -70 db 12.7/Freq Span 25.4/Freq Span Cutff time is the time between the stp time (-6 db n the filter skirt) and the peak f the first sidelbe. T 1 is the gate span, which is equal t the stp time minus the start time. T 2 is the time between the edge f the passband and the 6 db pint, representing the cutff rate f the filter. T 3 is the time between the 6 db pint and the edge f the gate stpband. 62 FieldFx User s Guide

63 Fr all filter shapes T 2 is equal t T 3, and the filter is the same n bth sides f the center time. Minimum gate span is twice the cutff time. Each gate shape has a minimum recmmended gate span fr prper peratin. This is a cnsequence f the finite cutff rate f the gate. If yu specify a gate span that is smaller than the minimum span, the respnse will shw the fllwing effects: distrted gate shape that has n passband distrted shape incrrect indicatins f start and stp times may have increased sidelbe levels. Time Dmain - Optin

64 Calibratin fr NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes Calibratin remves the systematic errrs that are assciated with measurements in NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes. Key presses are identical in all f these Mdes. In this Chapter Why and When t Calibrate Definitins CalReady Hw t Perfrm a Calibratin QuickCal Mechanical Cal ECal Simple Respnse Cal View Cal Calibratin Type Enhanced Respnse Optimizatin Interplatin Questinable Accuracy Cmpatible Mde Calibratins Save a Calibratin CalReady Prperties Verify Calibratin Calibratin Methd Summary See Als Learn Hw t Make 75 hm Measurements at the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: Why and When t Calibrate There are well-defined and understd systematic errrs that are measured and calculated during the calibratin prcess. These errrs are caused by leakage signals inside the FieldFx, by the frequency respnse f the FieldFx receivers, and by reflectins inside the FieldFx that interact with the DUT. After calibratin, these errrs are remved frm subsequent measurements. T maintain highest measurement accuracy, perfrm a new calibratin when any f the fllwing changes ccur: When any f the fllwing measurement settings change: Frequency Range, Pwer Level, IF BW, and Reslutin. Therefre, make these measurement settings befre calibrating. Increased Averaging, lwer IF BW, and higher Reslutin all cause slwer sweeps and slwer calibratin times. Learn abut Interplatin and Questinable Accuracy n page 77. When the FieldFx temperature changes mre than abut 10 F (5 C). Learn hw t mnitr the internal temperature n page FieldFx User s Guide

65 When the cnnectin t the DUT changes, requiring a different jumper cable r adapter. Definitins DUT (Device Under Test) The cable, antenna, transmissin line, amplifier, r anything else that is cnnected t the FieldFx that is t be measured. Calibratin Standards - OPEN, SHORT, LOAD, and THRU OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD are reflectin standards that are used during calibratin. When an RF signal hits these cmpnents, the signals are reflected in a predictable manner. These cmpnents can als be used t terminate a DUT prt during sme measurements. SHORT and OPEN standards bth cause 100% f an RF signal t be reflected. The difference between these tw standards is what happens t the phase f the reflected signal, which is beynd the scpe f this discussin. Althugh an OPEN standard is a precisin cmpnent, simply leaving nthing cnnected at the end f a cable can be a reasnable substitute fr an OPEN. A LOAD standard absrbs almst ALL f the incident signal and very little signal is reflected back t the surce. A THRU standard is used during sme calibratin steps t cnnect PORT 1 t PORT 2 in place f the DUT. A Flush THRU cnnectin can be made when cables that cnnect with the DUT can mate with each ther. Learn mre n page 73. Otherwise, any reasnably shrt cable can be used as a THRU standard. Calibratin Reference Plane is the pint (r pints) at which the DUT and cal standards are cnnected during a calibratin. This can be at the FieldFx test prt cnnectrs, r at the end f jumper cables r adapters. CalReady Every FieldFx cntains a factry calibratin that was perfrmed at the prt 1 and prt 2 cnnectrs, with -15 dbm input pwer, ver the entire frequency range f the FieldFx using a number f data pints that allws reasnable interplatin ver the FieldFx frequency range. This calibratin, knwn as CalReady, allws yu t immediately make measurements f a DUT that is cnnected directly at the test prts (PORT 1 and/r PORT 2). CalReady crrects measurements when the FieldFx is turned ON and when a measurement is created with n ther crrectin in place. When measuring a DUT using a jumper cable r adapter - NOT a direct cnnectin t a test prt cnnectr then a QuickCal r Mechanical Cal is recmmended. CalReady can als be used t check the integrity f the jumper cable that is attached t the test prts. CalRdy is shwn when a measurement is crrected using CalReady. Yu can change the prperties f the CalReady calibratin. Learn mre n page 78. Learn hw t see when yur factry CalReady calibratin was perfrmed n page 214. Calibratin fr NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes 65

66 Hw t Perfrm a Calibratin NOTE Press Esc at any time t end the calibratin prcess. In CAT, NA, r VVM Mde, press Cal 5. The fllwing appears: Chse Calibratin Methd screen NOTE Respnse Cal Used t quickly calibrate ONE measurement using mechanical standards. Measurement accuracy is generally lw. Learn mre n page 70. Quick Cal Using built-in cal standards and CalReady, quickly and accurately calibrate measurements when using a jumper cable r adapter t cnnect the DUT t the FieldFx test prts. Learn mre n page 66. Mechanical Cal Using mechanical cal standards frm a cal kit, perfrm an accurate calibratin at ne r bth test prts, adapters, r jumper cables. Full 2- prt mechanical calibratin is the mst accurate calibratin available with FieldFx. Learn mre n page 68. User Cal OFF ON Turns ON and OFF the effects f the user calibratin that yu perfrmed. The OFF state reverts t CalReady which can never be turned OFF. View Cal Shws the prperties f the current calibratin. Learn mre n page 73. Mre Learn abut Cal Ready Prperties n page 78. Surce Unleveled errrs - During calibratin, the frequency range f the measurement MAY be extended t prvide maximum flexibility. During the calibratin, the utput pwer may becme unleveled at the added high frequencies. Yu can ignre the Surce Unleveled errr, r t avid the errr, select either High pwer r -15 dbm befre calibrating. Learn mre abut setting Output Pwer n page 25. QuickCal QuickCal is ideal fr a quick and simple calibratin f the measurement when using a jumper cable r adapter t cnnect the DUT t the FieldFx test prts. QuickCal crrects fr phase shift, time delay, and lss f adapters r jumper cables. 66 FieldFx User s Guide

67 QuickCal des nt require a specific Cal Kit and is a very simple calibratin. If the highest accuracy is required, a mechanical calibratin with a high quality calibratin kit is recmmended. QuickCal is designed and mst accurate when calibrating fr DUTs fitted with Type-N and 7/16 cnnectrs. If the DUT has different cnnectrs, such as 3.5 mm (male) r SMA male cnnectrs, QuickCal can still be used by selecting 'Other' cnnectr. Hwever, the accuracy f QuickCal with Other cnnectrs is nt specified. If the DUT has 3.5 mm-female r SMA-female cnnectrs, QuickCal is NOT recmmended. Fr accurate and repeatable measurements f devices with female 3.5 mm r SMA cnnectrs, use mechanical calibratin. Imprtant QuickCal Ntes 7/16 cnnectrs can be used with QuickCal ONLY up t 6 GHz. Type-N 75 Ohm can be used with QuickCal ONLY up t 3 GHz. QuickCal cannt be used with waveguides, r if the test fixture r test setup (befre DUT) includes an attenuatr. Hw t perfrm a QuickCal In CAT, NA, r VVM Mde, press Cal 5 Then QuickCal Press Change DUT Cnnectrs t select the crrect cnnectr types that are n yur DUT. Althugh there is n Cal Kit required, selecting the cnnectr type (limited t Type-N and 7/16) and gender frm the list prvides an accurate OPEN mdel which means a mre accurate calibratin. If the DUT cnnectr type is nt listed, select Unknwn/Other. The cnnectr chices that are ffered depend n the frequency range. Fr example, if yu have selected a frequency range that exceeds 18 GHz, the nly cnnectr ptins yu will be presented with in QuickCal are 'ther 50 hm' r 'ther 75 hm'. This is because 3.5 mm cnnectrs, which g beynd 18 GHz, are nt supprted with QuickCal. Fr each DUT prt: Select the cnnectr type f the DUT using the arrws r rtary knb. Press Change Gender t change the gender f the DUT cnnectr. Then press Next t make the selectin. Select/Change Cal Type. The FieldFx always RECOMMENDS a Cal Type that will quickly and accurately calibrate all f the displayed S-parameters. The ther Cal Types that are listed will NOT necessarily calibrate all f the displayed S-parameters. Learn mre abut Cal Types n page 73. Using the arrws r rtary knb, select a Cal Type, then press Select and Finish. Press Start Calibratin N Cnnectin Discnnect the DUT frm the FieldFx. Calibratin fr NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes 67

68 If a jumper cable r adapter is required t cnnect the DUT t the FieldFx, cnnect thse cmpnents t the FieldFx test prts cnnectrs. The effects f thse cmpnents will be measured and remved during the calibratin, and nly the effects f the DUT will be displayed in the measurement results. These shuld be high-quality cmpnents! D NOT cnnect anything at the cal reference plane where the DUT cnnects. Press Measure Optinally Cnnect Lad(s) Cnnect a Lad standard at the pint where the DUT will be cnnected and press Measure under the fllwing cnditins: When a jumper cable has t much lss. If a Cal Failed errr appears and yu skipped the Lad measurement, then perfrm the Cal again but measuring the Lad. When yur DUT has high return lss such as the reject band f a filter. Then measuring the lad imprves accuracy. Even with the ptinal Lad, phase accuracy begins t degrade when the return lss is greater than abut 20dB. Press Skip Step in all ther cases and when making DTF measurements. Measuring a lad wuld d little t imprve accuracy. Cnnect THRU (Nt used fr 1-prt cals) Cnnect prt 1 t prt 2, either by mating the cnnectrs that attach t the DUT (Flush THRU), r by using a shrt jumper cable. Learn mre abut Flush THRU n page 73. Then press Measure. Press Finish. CAL ON Q is shwn n the screen fr all displayed measurements that are crrected with QuickCal. Using QuickCal with a Lng Jumper Cable QuickCal requires a sufficient frequency span t adequately characterize the jumper cable (the cable between the instrument prt and the DUT). If a Cal Failed errr appears and yu cnnected the ptinal Lad standard, then increase the frequency span f the measurement until the errr n lnger appears. After the calibratin, yu can then decrease the frequency span as needed and rely n interplatin. Learn mre abut Interplatin n page 77. QuickCal is als limited in hw much jumper cable lss it can tlerate. If QuickCal withut the lad is failing, then measure the lad during the QuickCal t see if that reslves the issue. Mechanical Cal NOTE Mechanical Calibratin is perfrmed using discrete standards frm a Cal Kit. Several Cal Kit definitins are built int the FieldFx. Visit t see a cmplete list f supprted Cal Kits. Als at this website, dwnlad DataLink sftware that allws yu t edit Cal Kit definitins r add a new Cal Kit. 68 FieldFx User s Guide

69 Mechanical Cals are extremely accurate when perfrmed using the crrect Cal Kits with standards that are clean and in gd repair, and when using crrect cnnectin prcedures. Hw t perfrm a Mechanical Cal Discnnect the DUT frm the FieldFx. If a jumper cable r adapter is required t cnnect the DUT t the FieldFx, then cnnect thse cmpnents t the FieldFx cnnectrs. The effects f thse cmpnents will be measured and remved during the calibratin, and nly the effects f the DUT will be displayed in the measurement results. These shuld be high-quality cmpnents! In NA, CAT, r VVM Mde, press Cal 5. Then Mechanical Cal This page summarizes the Mechanical Cal t be perfrmed and allws yu t make changes. Fr best results, review the screen and make changes in the fllwing rder: 1. S-parameters Verify that these are all f the S-parameters that yu want calibrated. If nt, press Esc t terminate the calibratin prcess, then return t the Trace menu t display all f the traces t be calibrated. Learn hw n page DUT Cnnectrs Fr each DUT prt that is shwn, verify the crrect type and gender f the DUT cnnectr. If a DUT prt is nt shwn, then that prt is nt included in the list f S-parameters t be calibrated. 3. Cal Kit - Verify the crrect Cal Kit fr each DUT prt t be calibrated. See a list f supprted Cal Kits in the FieldFx Data Sheet. Learn mre n page 232. If the DUT cnnectr type, gender, r Cal Kit is NOT crrect fr the DUT prts t be calibrated, then: Press Change DUT Cnnectrs t select the crrect cnnectr types that are n yur DUT. Fr each prt: Use the arrws r rtary knb t change the DUT cnnectr type. Calibratin fr NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes 69

70 Press Change Gender t change the gender f the DUT cnnectr. Then press Next t make the selectins. Fr each prt: Use the arrws r rtary knb t select the Cal Kit that yu have, and are ging t use, fr the specified prts. Then press Next t make the selectin. 4. Calibratin Type - The FieldFx always RECOMMENDS a Cal Type that will quickly and accurately calibrate all f the displayed S-parameters. Change frm the RECOMMENDED Cal Type ONLY if yu understand the implicatins. Learn mre abut Cal Types n page 73. T select a different Cal Type: Press Change Cal Type. Then using the arrws r rtary knb, select a Cal Type, Then press Select and Finish. Begin Calibratin Press Start Calibratin. NOTE If an errr appears ( Failure t cmpute calibratin steps ), check t ensure that the frequency range f the Cal Kit cvers the frequency range f the measurement. Yu can verify the frequency range f yur Cal Kit at: Click Cal Kits. Fllw the Cal Wizard prmpts. Cnnect the specified standard at the pint where the DUT will be cnnected, then press Measure. At any time, press Back t re-measure a standard if yu feel it was nt prperly cnnected. Press Finish t cmplete the calibratin. CAL ON U is shwn n the screen fr all displayed measurements that are crrected with the Mechanical Cal. ECal ECal is a cmplete slid-state calibratin slutin. Every ECal mdule cntains electrnic standards that are autmatically switched int psitin during a calibratin. These electrnic standards have been measured at the factry and the data stred within the memry f the ECal mdule. The FieldFx uses this stred data, alng with the measured data, t calculate the errr terms fr a measurement calibratin. Yu can perfrm the fllwing calibratins with ECal: 1-Prt Reflectin calibratin Full 2-Prt calibratin All Agilent USB ECal mdules are supprted. ECal mdules are available in a variety f cnnectr types, cvering many frequency ranges. Fr infrmatin abut available ECal mdules, see 70 FieldFx User s Guide

71 Select an ECal mdule that has cnnectrs f the same type and gender as the DUT. If such an ECal mdule is nt available, a mdule with cnnectrs different frm the DUT can be used by selecting a User Characterizatin. Hwever, a User Characterizatin can NOT be PERFORMED using the FieldFx. It must be perfrmed using a bench tp Agilent VNA, such as the PNA r ENA. Learn mre abut User Characterizatin at the PNA Help website: m. Hw t Perfrm a Calibratin Using ECal NOTE Make measurement settings n the FieldFx (frequency range, number f pints, etc.) The frequency range f the measurement MUST be within the frequency range f the ECal mdule r an errr will appear when Calculating Steps during the calibratin. Cnnect the ECal mdule USB cable t the FieldFx USB. Allw the mdule t warm up until it indicates READY. Cnnect the ECal mdule prts t the FieldFx at the calibratin reference plane (where the DUT will be cnnected). Press Cal 5 t start the Calibratin. Press Mechanical Cal / ECal Press Change DUT Cnnectrs. Fr each test prt t be calibrated, select the Cnnectr Type and Gender f the DUT / ECal mdule. The cnnected ECal mdule and relevant User Characterizatins will appear as the default Cal Kit. Optinally press Advanced then ECal Aut Orient. ON (default) The FieldFx autmatically senses the directin in which the ECal mdule prts are cnnected t the FieldFx prts. OFF If pwer t the ECal mdule is t lw, it cannt detect which FieldFx prts it is cnnected t. If yu are having this prblem, select OFF. Then during the calibratin, the FieldFx will prmpt yu t cnnect the ECal mdule prts t specific FieldFx prts. Optinally press Advanced then Simple ECal. ON (default) The FieldFx assumes that bth prts f the ECal mdule can be cnnected at bth calibratin reference planes. Yu therefre receive a single prmpt t cnnect the ECal mdule t bth prts. OFF Select when physical restrictins prhibit the ECal mdule frm being cnnected t bth calibratin reference planes simultaneusly. Yu will receive separate prmpts t cnnect the ECal mdule t Prt 1, then t cnnect the ECal t Prt 2. Press Start Calibratin. When prmpted, cnnect the ECal mdule, then press Measure. The standards within the ECal mdule are autmatically cnnected and measured. Calibratin fr NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes 71

72 NOTE When prmpted: "Cnnect prt 1 t prt 2", then yu can cnnect them hwever yu chse, including using the internal ECal THRU. This is an Unknwn THRU. When prmpted: "Cnnect prt 1 directly t prt 2", then yu must cnnect the prts directly tgether at the calibratin reference plane with n adapter r ther cabling. This is a Flush THRU. Learn mre n page 73. Simple Respnse Cals Simple Respnse Cals are used t quickly calibrate the magnitude and phase f a measurement using any Open, Shrt, r Thru cmpnent. These may be calibratin standards, but because a Cal Kit is nt selected, they are nt mdeled. Measurement accuracy is generally lw. Use a Simple Respnse Cal t make quick measurements when using a jumper cable t cnnect the DUT t the FieldFx. Otherwise, CalReady is usually mre accurate. NOTE Yu can perfrm a Simple Respnse Cal fr either: S11, S22, r S21 AND S12. When prmpted, chse a standard based n the displayed measurements t be calibrated. Fr example, t calibrate S11, cnnect either an OPEN r SHORT t the prt 1 reference plane. 1-prt respnse cals are als available frm the Mechanical Cal menu. Learn mre n page 75. Nrmalize uses a THRU standard r cable between prt 1 and prt 2 t cal an S21 and S12 Transmissin measurement (NA Mde) and a 2-prt Insertin Lss measurement (CAT Mde). In VVM Mde, this is perfrmed using Zer. Hw t perfrm a Simple Respnse Cal Select the measurements t be calibrated. See the relevant Mde (NA, CAT, r VVM) fr measurement selectins. Press Cal 5 then Respnse Cal Fr 1-prt measurements: NOTE Select either Open Respnse r Shrt Respnse fr the prt t be calibrated. Prt 2 may require an ptin. Cnnect an OPEN r SHORT standard t the specified prt and press Measure Fr 2-prt measurements: Select Nrmalizatin Cnnect a shrt, high-quality, phase stable cable between the FieldFx prt 1 and prt 2 cnnectrs, then press Measure With a Nrmalizatin Cal, all subsequent insertin lss measurements are made relative t the insertin lss f the THRU cable. Fr example, if yu use a cable with 1 db f lss, then after Nrmalizatin, the display will shw 0 db f lss with this cable in place. Therefre, fr highest accuracy, when measuring the DUT als attach the cable that was used in the nrmalizatin cal. Press Finish. Cnnect the DUT. 72 FieldFx User s Guide

73 CAL ON U is shwn n the screen when a Respnse Cal is crrecting ONLY the apprpriate measurement. View Cal Frm the Chse Calibratin screen (page 66), press View Cal t see the fllwing screen: The tp bx shws the prperties f the current calibratin that yu perfrmed and the displayed S-parameters that it is crrecting. The bttm bx shws the S-parameters that are displayed but NOT crrected by the current perfrmed calibratin, but rather the CalReady calibratin. Learn mre abut CalReady n page 65. Calibratin Type The FieldFx simplifies the calibratin prcess by recmmending the mst accurate and efficient calibratin type based n the displayed S-parameters. Hwever, there may be times when yu may want a little mre accuracy r a little faster sweep time. The fllwing infrmatin can help yu learn abut the varius calibratin chices. Definitins: Nn-insertable DUT A device whse cnnectrs culd NOT mate tgether. They either d nt have the same type f cnnectr r they have the same gender. This als means that the test prt cables culd NOT mate tgether as in the abve diagram. Insertable DUT A device whse cnnectrs culd mate tgether. They have the same type f cnnectr and ppsite r n gender. This als means that the test prt cables culd mate tgether, as in the abve diagram. Calibratin fr NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes 73

74 Defined THRU A THRU standard fr which there is a Cal Kit definitin such as in the 8551xA Cal Kits. Flush THRU (als knwn as Zer length THRU) When the test prt cables mate tgether when measuring an Insertable DUT. Flush THRU is als a Defined THRU with a definitin f zer lss and zer length. Unknwn THRU - Any THRU cnnectin between the test prts. Fr mre infrmatin see the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: Sweep Directins Bth FULL 2-Prt Cals listed belw result in crrectin that requires backgrund measurements sweeps in bth directins, regardless f the displayed measurements. The displayed traces are updated at a slwer rate than Enhanced Respnse and 1-prt calibratins, which require sweeps in ne directin nly. 1-Prt (OSL) DUT: Nt Applicable S-parameters Crrected: S11 r S22 Standards: OPEN, SHORT, LOAD Sweeps in ONE directin. FULL 2-Prt (May require an ptin). Mst cmprehensive calibratin. Crrects all S-parameters. DUT: Nn-Insertable r Insertable Standards: OPEN, SHORT, LOAD n BOTH prts. Any THRU between prts. Based n the SOLR/Unknwn THRU calibratin. Fr mre infrmatin n the Unknwn THRU prcess, see the FieldFx Supplemental Online Help: Sweeps in BOTH directins. FULL 2-Prt (QSOLT) Mechanical Cal ONLY (May require an ptin). Quicker t perfrm than Full 2-prt. Crrects all S-parameters. DUT: Insertable nly Standards: OPEN, SHORT, LOAD n prt 1. Flush THRU between prts. Recmmended cal type fr Insertable DUTs. A Cal Kit is NOT required fr prt 2. Sweeps in BOTH directins. Enhanced Respnse Cal - Frward OR Reverse (May require an ptin) Faster measurements than Full 2-Prt. DUT: Nn-Insertable r Insertable. S-parameters PARTIALLY Crrected: S21 and S11 (Frward) OR S12 and S22 (Reverse) Standards: OPEN, SHORT, LOAD n ONE prt. Defined r Flush THRU between prts. Sweeps in ONE directin. NOTE Als select an Enhanced Respnse Optimizatin. Learn mre n page FieldFx User s Guide

75 TRL Mechanical Cal ONLY. A cmplete 2-Prt calibratin with ptentially better accuracy than Full 2-prt. Crrects all S-parameters. DUT: Nn-Insertable r Insertable Standards: Thru, Reflect, Line r variatins f these. A TRL Cal Kit MUST be selected t see this Cal Type. Sweeps in BOTH directins. Learn mre abut TRL Calibratin in the Supplemental Online Help: 1-prt Respnse Cals (Open r Shrt) Calibrate the magnitude and phase f a measurement using mdeled mechanical standards. Measurement accuracy is better than Simple Respnse Cals (available n the main Cal page) but NOT as gd as full 1-prt cal. Crrects either S11 r S22. Can be used with Islatin (see fllwing sectin). Learn mre abut Simple Respnse Cals n page 72. DUT: Nn-Insertable r Insertable Standards: OPEN r SHORT n ONE prt. Sweeps in BOTH directins. Islatin Step The ptinal islatin step f a calibratin crrects fr crsstalk which is the internal signal leakage between the test prts. The additinal Islatin step measures Lad standards that are cnnected t ne r bth FieldFx test prts. Perfrm an islatin calibratin when yu are testing a device with high insertin lss, such as the stp band f a filter r a switch in the pen psitin. The islatin step can add nise t the errr mdel when the measurement is very clse t the nise flr f the analyzer. T imprve measurement accuracy, set a narrw IF Bandwidth during the calibratin. The Islatin step is NOT allwed with ECal r QuickCal. Hw t perfrm the additinal Islatin step Press Cal 5 then Mechanical Cal / ECal Then Advanced Then Omit Islatin NOTE OFF Perfrm the Islatin step. ON (default) Omits the Islatin step. Then <Back Cnfigure and perfrm the calibratin as usual. At the first step f the Cal yu will be prmpted t cnnect a Lad standard t ne r bth test prts. If the first calibratin step des NOT prmpt yu t cnnect Lad standards, then the Cal Kit prbably des nt cntain an Islatin standard. Yu can use DataLink sftware t edit the Cal Kit and add an islatin standard using a Lad standard. See Data Link Help fr mre infrmatin: Calibratin fr NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes 75

76 This setting survives an Instrument Preset. Waveguide Calibratins In general, calibrating with Waveguide is very similar t calibrating with cax. Hwever, mst cax mechanical Cal Kits have standards that can be used ver a very wide frequency range. Waveguide Cal Kits are used ver a narrw frequency range. Therefre, it is VERY IMPORTANT t set the frequency range f the measurement WITHIN the frequency range f the waveguide Cal Kit. Otherwise, an errr message will appear during the Calculating Steps prtin f the calibratin. Waveguide Cal Kits Agilent sells tw waveguide Cal Kit series: the premium 11644A series and the ecnmy N9911X series. Bth are available nline at Effective Velcity Factr Velcity factr is the speed at which an electrmagnetic signal passes thrugh the transmissin medium relative t the speed f light. This value is imprtant when distance is being calculated in DTF measurements (CAT mde) and Time Dmain (NA mde). When the media is waveguide, the velcity factr changes with frequency. FieldFx calculates this effective velcity factr autmatically. Hwever, the settings are different fr CAT mde and NA mde. CAT Mde - Hw t make Waveguide settings These settings are necessary ONLY when making DTF measurements. Press Measure 1 then select a DTF measurement. Press Meas Setup 4 Then Settings (Learn hw t use the Quick Settings table n page 22.) Set Media = Waveguide. Frequency Mde = BandPass is autmatically selected fr yu. Scrll dwn t Waveguide Definitins. Select the Waveguide Standard being used. If yur waveguide standard is NOT listed: Select User Waveguide. Then press Dne. Then DTF Cable Specificatins, then Edit/Save/Recall Cables, then Edit Cable. Scrll t set Waveguide Definitin and set VF Crr = Aut. Then set the Min, Max, and Cutff Frequencies. Set Cable Crrectin = Aut. The Effective Velcity Factr is calculated autmatically based n the frequencies f the waveguide standard. T verride this setting, set Cable Crrectin = Man. NA Mde - Hw t make Waveguide settings These settings are necessary ONLY when yur measurement requires electrical delay r prt extensins, r if using Time Dmain Transfrm. Press Meas Setup 4 76 FieldFx User s Guide

77 Then Transfrm Then Transfrm Settings Under Transfrm Stimulus Settings, set the Start and Stp frequencies t thse f the Waveguide. Set Stimulus = Bandpass Impulse Press Meas Setup 4 Then Calibratin Settings Set Media = Waveguide Set Cutff Frequency. This is the abslute minimum frequency f the waveguide. This value must be less than the Start Frequency f the Waveguide. Enter the calculated Effective VF value int the Velcity Factr setting. Enhanced Respnse Optimizatin When Enhanced Respnse Cal Type is selected, either fr ne calibratin r fr CalReady, this setting ptimizes the calibratin based n the type f DUT being measured. See als: CalReady Prperties n page 78. This setting des NOT survive Preset. Press Cal 5 then Mre Then Enh.Respnse Then chse frm: Nn-Reciprcal (default) An amplifier is a Nn-Reciprcal device because it has gain in the frward directin, and very high lss (islatin) in the reverse directin. This chice prvides the best crrectin fr nn-reciprcal devices, and reasnable crrectin fr reciprcal devices. Reciprcal A reciprcal DUT is a device in which the insertin lss thrugh the device is similar in bth the frward (S21) and reverse (S12) directins. A cable is a reciprcal device. This chice prvides the best crrectin fr reciprcal devices. Hwever, S11 measurements n nn-reciprcal devices will appear t have mre return lss than the nn-reciprcal chice. Interplatin * Highest measurement accuracy is achieved when the frequency range r reslutin settings remain the same during the measurement as when the FieldFx was calibrated. If these settings change after perfrming a calibratin, the FieldFx will interplate the calibratin s that VERY accurate measurements cntinue t be made. Interplated Calibratins are nly slightly less accurate than a calibratin perfrmed at the measurement settings. Learn mre abut the relative accuracy f FieldFx calibratins n page 80. When a calibratin that yu perfrmed is being interplated, an asterisk is added t the Cal anntatin. Fr example: Cal ON U* is shwn n the screen when the current Respnse r Mechanical cal is being interplated. An * is never added t a CalRdy. Calibratin fr NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes 77

78 Cal ON? Questinable Accuracy When the Output Pwer, Interference Rejectin, r IF BW (NA Mde ONLY) setting is changed AFTER perfrming a calibratin, a questin mark is added t the Cal anntatin. Fr example: Cal ON Q?. is shwn n the screen when the current QuickCal is being interplated. An? is never added t CalRdy. The resulting measurement accuracy depends n hw much the setting has changed. Fr highest accuracy, recalibrate using the new settings. Cmpatible Mde Calibratins The FieldFx can have nly ONE calibratin present fr all mdes. Calibrating in ne mde will verwrite calibratins fr ther mdes. Because NA, CAT, and VVM mdes are very similar, a calibratin that is perfrmed in ne mde can als be applied in the ther mdes with the same type f measurements (1-prt r 2-prt). T apply a Cal that was perfrmed in a different mde, press Cal 5 then select Cal ON. Save the Calibratin After perfrming any type f calibratin, yu can save the FieldFx settings alng with the calibratin int a STATE (*.sta) file. These settings and calibratin can then be recalled as necessary. T learn hw, see Saving and Recalling Files n page 190. CalReady Prperties There are several factry CalReady calibratins n every FieldFx. These can be selected based n the type f DUT that yu measure mst ften, and the cmprmise that yu prefer t make between measurement speed versus measurement accuracy. Remember, CalReady was perfrmed at the test prts. Therefre, a CalReady calibratin is mst accurate when the DUT is cnnected t the test prts. Learn mre abut CalReady n page 65. This setting des NOT survive Preset r Pwer ON/OFF. Press Cal 5 then Mre Then CalRdy Then chse frm: 2-Prt Cal (default) Crrects all fur S-parameters. Requires a frward and reverse sweep, which causes slwer trace measurements. Learn why n page 73. Enh Respnse Crrects frward (S21 and S11) and reverse (S12 and S22) measurements separately. Therefre, when measurements in nly ne directin are required, this chice prvides faster trace measurements than a full 2-prt cal. Als chse an Enhanced Respnse Optimizatin. Learn mre n page 75. T find the best chice fr yur DUT: Press Preset then Preset. 78 FieldFx User s Guide

79 Select the apprpriate S-Parameter and ther settings (frequency range, reslutin, and s frth). Press Trace 6 then Math and Memry then Data->Mem. Press Data & Memry. Press Cal 5 then Mre Select a CalReady Cal t cmpare with the current setting. Press Esc t exit the cal menu. View the differences in the tw traces. Verifying Calibratin and Jumper Cable Integrity After calibrating, it is imprtant t verify that the calibratin is gd. When using a jumper cable, als verify that the cable is f high quality. Verify a Calibratin Cnnect a LOAD standard at the calibratin reference plane (where calibratin standards were cnnected). This may be at the end f the jumper cable r at FieldFx PORT 1 cnnectr. In CAT Mde, select Return Lss. In NA Mde, select S11 with Lg Mag frmat. Fr frequencies lwer than 9 GHz, bserve the trace n the FieldFx screen: Lwer than 35 db indicates a GOOD calibratin. Higher than 0 db indicates that yu shuld recalibrate. Verifying Phase Accuracy Cnnect a LOAD standard at the calibratin reference plane (where calibratin standards were cnnected). In NA Mde, select a S11 Reflectin with Plar r Smith Chart frmat. Because all LOAD standards have delay, yu shuld see a small amunt f phase rtatin as a functin f frequency. In general, the measurement result shuld agree with the characteristics f the calibratin standard. Test the Jumper Cable With the LOAD standard still cnnected, mve the jumper cable while bserving the trace. If the measurement trace is relatively stable, the jumper cable is f gd quality. If yu bserve significant mvement in the peaks f the measurement trace when mving the cable (>5 db), the jumper cable may need t be replaced. Calibratin fr NA, CAT, and VVM Mdes 79

80 Calibratin Methd Summary Mechanical Full 2-prt Cal is ALWAYS the mst accurate Cal methd. The quality f a Mechanical Cal is cmpletely dependent n the quality f the OPEN, SHORT, LOAD standards and the quality f the standard cnnectins. Use the crrect high quality standards t ensure the mst accurate calibratin. QuickCal is ideal fr DTF measurements. QuickCal shuld be perfrmed when gd accuracy is required and when using a jumper cable r adapter. QuickCal is NOT recmmended when the DUT has 3.5 mm-female r SMAfemale cnnectrs. Even with the ptinal Lad, phase accuracy begins t degrade when the return lss is greater than abut 20dB. CalReady is accurate ONLY when the DUT is cnnected at the test prts and mst accurate at rm temperature. Fr highest accuracy, a new QuickCal r Mechanical Cal shuld be perfrmed: When the temperature changes mre than abut 10 F (5 C) When the cnnectin t the DUT requires a different jumper cable r adapters. When any f the fllwing measurement settings change: Frequency Range, Pwer Level, IF BW, and Reslutin. 80 FieldFx User s Guide

81 SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde SA Mde measures signals at the SA RF IN cnnectr. SA Mde measurements require NO calibratin. Fr a cmprehensive SA mde tutrial, see Spectrum Analysis Basics (App Nte 150) at In this Chapter SA display with markers Carrier with 5 khz frequency mdulatin and deviatin f 1 khz Frequency Range Radi Standard Channel Selectin Scale and Units External Gain Attenuatin and Preamp Cntrl Check fr Cmpressed Measurements Field Strength Measurements Tune and Listen Independent Surce Reslutin Bandwidth Vide Bandwidth Sweep Type IF Output Sweep Acquisitin Very Lng Sweep Times SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 81

82 Zer Span Measurements Triggering FFT Gating (Optin 238) Single/Cntinuus/Restart Pints Trace Display States Average Type Average Cunt InstAlign Amplitude Alignment RF Burst Alignment Detectin Methd Display Line Nise Marker Band/Interval Pwer Marker Frequency Cunter at Marker Audi Beep at Marker Pwer Channel Measurements Channel Pwer Occupied Bandwidth Adjacent Channel Pwer Rati See Als Interference Analyzer Spectrgram Display Waterfall Display Recrd / Playback Optinal settings Markers Limit Lines Save Measurement Settings and Results SA Mde Settings Select SA Mde befre making any setting in this chapter. Because there is n calibratin, these settings can be made in any rder. Hw t select SA Mde Press Mde_. Then SA. 82 FieldFx User s Guide

83 Frequency Range NOTE The X-axis frequency range determines the frequencies that are measured fr each sweep. The default Start frequency is 0 Hz. Hwever, the Start frequency can be set as lw as 100 MHz. The internal LO f the FieldFx can be seen at 0 Hz, which will mask signals that may be present. Althugh the start frequency can be set as lw as -100 MHz, amplitude accuracy is specified abve 100 khz. Belw 100 khz, frequency accuracy is maintained, but amplitude accuracy is degraded. The frequency range f the measurement can be changed using the fllwing methds: Set Center and Span frequencies Set Start and Stp frequencies Tggle between Zer and Last selected span Set Full Span f the FieldFx Using Channel selectin. Learn hw n page 85. Using Marker -> Center (frequency). Learn hw n page 179. Hw t set Frequency Range Press Freq/Dist. Then chse frm the fllwing: Center and Freq Span frequencies. This is the mst cmmn methd f entering frequency range. Enter the frequency f interest. The Center frequency is at the exact center f the X-axis. The Frequency Span places half f the frequency range n either side f center. When the Center and Frequency Span values are entered, then the X-axis anntatin n the screen shws the Center and Span frequencies. Start and Stp frequencies. Start is the beginning f the X-axis and Stp is the end f the X-axis. When the Start and Stp frequencies are entered, then the X-axis anntatin n the screen shws the Start and Stp frequencies. Fllw each f these by entering a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. When using the arrws, press Enter. The increment setting f the arrws is based n the current span. This can be changed in SA Mde. See Hw t change frequency step size belw. After using the keypad, select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Tw mre ways t change the frequency range Press Freq/Dist. Then chse frm the fllwing: Zer/Last Span Each key press tggles the frequency span between 0 Hz and the last specified frequency span. Learn mre abut Zer Span n page 99. Mre SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 83

84 Then Full Span Selects the entire frequency span f the FieldFx. The Center frequency is set autmatically. Hw t change frequency step size When using the arrws t change any f the frequency settings, the size f the frequency step can be changed. Press Freq/Dist Then Mre Then CF Step Aut Man Aut Each press f the arrws increments r decrements the value by 1/10 th (ne divisin) f the current frequency span. Nte: T change this setting frm Man t Aut, press CF Step twice. Man Type a step size value using the numeric keypad, then select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Radi Standard A Radi Standard is a cllectin f settings that are applied t the FieldFx fr specific RF prtcls. When a Radi Standard is applied, the FieldFx frequency and channel settings change t that f the standard. By default, the FieldFx lcates the center frequency f the standard in the middle f the screen and sets the frequency span t cver all f the Uplink and Dwnlink frequencies. The selected Radi Standard name appears in the center f the screen belw the X-axis. After a Radi Standard has been selected, the frequency range can be changed by selecting channel numbers rather than frequency. Learn hw n page 85. When a Channel Measurement is selected such as ACPR, ther relevant settings will be changed such as Integratin BW. Learn mre abut Radi Standards and Channel Measurements n page 114. Hw t select a Radi Standard Press Measure 1 OR Freq/Dist then Mre Then Radi Standard Then select a standard using the arrws r rtary knb and press Enter. Custm Radi Standards Yur wn custm Radi Standards can be imprted int the FieldFx. Custm standards are created in *.csv (spreadsheet) frmat. A template and instructins fr creating yur custm Radi Standard is at: Once imprted, the *.csv file is stred in the FieldFx \User Data\ flder. The custm Radi Standards are read and presented at the tp f the list f internal Radi Standards. 84 FieldFx User s Guide

85 NOTE Hw t Imprt and Delete a Custm Radi Standard First, press Save/Recall and select the Device frm which the Radi Standard will be read. Mst likely this will be USB r SD Card. Press Measure 1 OR Freq/Dist then Mre Then Radi Standard Then Imprt Radi Standards Then select the *.csv file using the arrws r rtary knb and press Enter. Custm Radi Standards can be remved frm the FieldFx by selecting Measure 1 then Radi Standard then Delete Radi Standard. Then select the *.csv file t delete using the arrws r rtary knb and press Enter. T verwrite a custm standard that is already upladed t the FieldFx, yu must first delete the *.csv file frm the FieldFx, then re-uplad the file that cntains the standard. A predefined internal standard (such as GSM 450) can NOT be deleted frm the FieldFx. Channel Selectin After a Radi Standard has been selected, the frequency range can be changed by selecting channel numbers rather than frequency. Once enabled, the channel number is appended t the X-axis frequency range. Hw t enable Channel selectin Press Freq/Dist Then Mre Then Unit Freq Chan Hw t change the Channel Number f the measurement With Unit = Chan the FieldFx will NOT allw yu t specify channels utside f the selected Radi Standard. Press Freq/Dist Then chse frm the fllwing: Center Channel Places the center frequency f the specified channel in the middle f the X-axis. Start Channel Places the lwest frequency f the specified channel at the beginning f the X-axis. Stp Channel Places the highest frequency f the specified channel at the end f the X-axis. Freq Span Changes the span f frequencies while the center frequency remains unchanged. Fllw each f the abve settings by entering a value using the numeric keypad r the rtary knb. SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 85

86 Use the arrws t increment the channel number by an amunt specified by the Channel Step value (see belw). Then press Enter. Select either Uplink r Dwnlink Frequencies Press Chan Directin t tggle between Uplink and Dwnlink. If either f these selectins is nt available, then the selected Radi Standard des nt cntain thse frequencies. Channel number X-axis anntatin Dn indicates Dwnlink frequencies. Up (nt shwn) indicates Uplink frequencies ( ) indicates that the lwest frequency in the channel (128) is at the left edge f the screen. (+) indicates that the highest frequency in the channel (130) is at the right edge f the screen. When Center Channel r Freq Span is specified, the X-axis shws the Center Freq (Channel) and Frequency Span. When Start r Stp Channel is specified, the X-axis shws the Start Freq (Channel) and Stp Freq (Channel). Change Channel Step Size (Optinal) This setting allws yu t use the arrws t increment the channel number by the specified value. Press Channel Step Enter a step value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Then press Enter. Scale and Units Adjust the Y-axis scale t see the relevant prtins f the data trace. The Y-axis is divided int 10 graticules. A Reference Level is shwn n the screen as a slid hrizntal bar that can be placed at any graticule. When RF Attenuatin set t Aut, the RF Attenuatin is cupled t Reference Level. Hw t set Scale Press Scale / Amptd. Then chse frm the fllwing: 86 FieldFx User s Guide

87 Scale Type [current setting] Lg Lgarithmic scale (default setting). The Y-axis reference line represents the specified abslute Reference Level in the current Unit selectin. Y-axis graticules shw db belw r abve the reference line. Lin Linear scale. The Y-axis reference line represents the specified abslute Reference Level in the current Unit selectin. Y-axis graticules shw percent f Reference Level (%) belw r abve the reference line. Manually set Scale, Reference Level, and Reference Psitin. Scale Manually adjust the scale per divisin t view specific areas f the current trace. Enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Then press Enter. Ref Level Manually set the value f the reference line. Enter a negative value by pressing Run/Hld (+/-) either befre r after typing a value. This can als change the RF Attenuatin setting. See Attenuatin Cntrl Aut. Ref Psitin Manually set the psitin f the reference line. Values must be between 0 (TOP line) and 10 (BOTTOM line). Default psitin is zer (tp). Press Mre, then Autscale Autmatically adjusts the Y-axis t cmfrtably fit the Min and Max amplitude f the trace n the screen. Hw t set Y-axis Units The Unit setting appears fr the reference line, marker readuts, and trigger level. All Unit chices are available in bth Lg and Linear Scale Types. The UNIT setting survives Mde Preset, but NOT Preset. Press Scale / Amptd, then Mre, then Unit Then chse frm the fllwing: dbm (default setting), dbmv (db milli Vlts), dbuv (db micrvlts), W (watts), V (vlts), A (amps), dbma (db milliamps), dbua (db micramps). Antenna crrectin units are available ONLY by lading r editing an Antenna file that cntains the desired units setting. Learn mre n page 90. External Gain When using an external amplifier r attenuatr, the SA mde trace amplitude values can be ffset t cmpensate fr the effect f the external device. This effectively mves the reference plane f the SA measurement prt ut t just beynd the external device. Fr example, when using an external preamp with gain f +10 db, enter this value fr External Gain, and the data trace acrss the displayed frequency span will be adjusted dwn by 10 db. When RF Atten is set t Aut, yu may see a change in the RF Attenuatin value. This is an attempt t measure the signal at tp f screen (the Reference Level) withut verlading the SA first mixer. Hw t set External Gain Press Scale/Amptd. Then Mre SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 87

88 Then External Gain Enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb (psitive fr gain; negative fr lss). Values less than 5 db must be typed using the numeric keypad. Then press Enter ExtGain xx db is shwn at the tp f the screen. Attenuatin Cntrl Bth the RF Attenuatin and Pre Amp functins cntrl the pwer level int the SA. When t much pwer is present at the RF Input prt, ADC Over Range appears n the FieldFx screen. This des nt necessarily mean that damage has ccurred, but that the measurement is prbably cmpressed. When high pwer levels are present at the RF Input cnnectr, internal attenuatin can be switched in t keep the FieldFx receiver frm cmpressing. At extremely high pwer levels, use external attenuatin t prtect the internal circuitry frm being damaged. WARNING The FieldFx can be damaged with t much pwer. RF Damage Level: +27 dbm DC Damage Level: ±50 VDC The displayed pwer level is autmatically adjusted fr RF Attenuatin. As the attenuatin value changes, the displayed pwer level shuld NOT change. Hw t set Attenuatin Press Scale/Amptd. Then RF Atten Aut Man. Aut RF Attenuatin is set by adjusting the Reference Level. As the Reference Level is lwered, fr example frm 10 dbm t 30 dbm, the FieldFx assumes that yu are lking at lw-level signals. The RF Attenuatin value is autmatically lwered in 5 db steps t allw lw-level signals t be viewed. The RF Attenuatin value is never autmatically lwered belw 5 db. Man RF Attenuatin is set manually. The default Attenuatin setting is 10 db. Enter a value between 0 t 30 db in 5 db steps using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Then press Enter #Atten xx db is shwn at the tp f the screen. (#) means manual setting. Preamplifier Cntrl (Opt 235) When very lw-level signals are analyzed, an internal preamplifier can be used t bst the signal level by apprximately 22 db. The gain f the preamp is NOT adjustable. The displayed signal level is autmatically adjusted fr the increase in system gain. Hw t cntrl the Preamp By default, the preamp is OFF. Press Scale/Amptd. 88 FieldFx User s Guide

89 Then Preamp ON OFF The underlined setting is the current setting. When ON, PA is shwn t the left f the graticules n the display. Check fr Cmpressed Measurements Cmpressin ccurs when t much pwer int an amplifier causes it t n lnger amplify in a linear manner. When t much pwer ges int the FieldFx RF Input cnnectr, the amplifiers in the SA receiver cmpress and signal pwer will nt be displayed accurately. This can ccur even if ADC Over Range is nt displayed. Increase the RF Attenuatin value t prevent the SA receiver frm being cmpressed. Hw t Check fr a Cmpressed Measurement Using a marker at the signal peak, make nte f the signal pwer level. Increase the RF Attenuatin level by 5 db. If the signal level des NOT change, then NO cmpressin exists. This indicates that the signal is in the linear regin f the FieldFx receiver. If the signal level DOES increase, then the receiver was cmpressed. Set the RF Attenuatin value at the setting when further increases n lnger result in an increase in the displayed pwer level. Field Strength Measurements T measure the strength f any signal transmitted thrugh the air, an antenna must be cnnected t the FieldFx. The Field Strength feature allws yu t enter the frequency respnse f the receiving antenna (the Antenna Factr) and assciated cabling, and then have amplitude crrectins autmatically cmpensate the displayed trace fr that respnse. Field Strength Measurements Trace 1 - Crrected trace with antenna factr. (Antenna = ON, Apply Crr = ON) Trace 2 - (View) Uncrrected trace (Apply Crr = OFF) Red Trace - Current crrectin factr. See belw. SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 89

90 Learn hw t set Y-Axis Units n page 86. Use a Band Pwer marker t measure ttal pwer ver a range f frequencies. Learn hw n page 184. Hw t select crrectin fr Field Strength measurements The Antenna and Cable crrectin data survives a Mde Preset and Preset. All Crrectin ON/OFF states survive a Mde Preset, but NOT a Preset. Press Scale/Amptd. Then Mre Then Crrectins Then chse frm the fllwing: Apply Crrectins ON OFF Turn ON and OFF crrectin fr all settings Antenna ON OFF Turn ON and OFF Antenna crrectin. Edit/Save/Recall Antennas Recall r edit an Antenna Crrectin table. See belw. Cable ON OFF Turn ON and OFF Cable crrectin. Edit/Save/Recall Cables Recall r edit a Cable Crrectin table. See belw. View Crrectins ON OFF Turn ON and OFF Red Trace - Antenna/Cable crrectins. Using the Antenna/Cable Editr NOTE The Antenna Editr and the Cable Editr menus are very similar. Bth tables include header infrmatin, and a Frequency/Value table. The FieldFx limits Antenna and Cable crrectin t a maximum f 90 values. FieldFx Antenna Editr Hw t use the Antenna/Cable Editr Press New then Yes t clear all data frm the existing Antenna r Cable table and reset header infrmatin t default settings. Then Edit Antenna r Edit Cable t pen the Antenna / Cable Editr. 90 FieldFx User s Guide

91 Then use the arrws t select a field, T edit header infrmatin, press Edit then mdify the selected field using the FieldFx labeler. Descriptin: Enter a descriptin fr the antenna r cable crrectin table. This is NOT the filename used t save the file. Antenna Unit: Units in which the measurement will be displayed. Select NONE (default setting) t select frm standard SA Units n the Scale menu. Learn hw n page 86. Chse frm: db μv/m - (db micr Vlts per meter), db μa/m - (db micr Amps per meter), dbg (gauss), dbpt (tesla). Freq Interplatin: Set t LINear and can NOT be edited. T edit Frequency/Value pairs, enter numbers using the numeric keypad, and a frequency suffix when necessary. Fr Cable Lss, psitive values are interpreted as LOSS; negative values are interpreted as GAIN which is used t describe an amplifier. Fr Antenna Factr, nly psitive values are valid. Antenna factr describes the db value needed t accurately display a far-field signal in terms that are in the units listed belw. When the antenna has lw gain, r lw efficiency, the db value t be added is larger. Learn mre abut Antenna Factr at: When ne Freq/Value pair is entered, that crrectin value is applied t the entire displayed frequency span. When tw r mre Freq/Value pairs are entered, the data pints between the lwest and highest frequencies are crrected. Linear interplatin is applied between frequencies when necessary. Optinally chse frm the fllwing: Previus / Next Page Quickly scrlls thrugh pages f Freq/Value data. Add Data Add a blank Freq/Value pair t the table, Delete/Clear then: Delete Line Remve the selected Freq/Value pair frm the table. Clear All then Yes Remve all Freq/Value pairs frm the table and resets header infrmatin t default settings. When the table edits are cmplete Press Dne t clse the Antenna/Cable Editr. Press Save Antenna r Save Cable t saves yur changes t the specified Strage Device. Enter a filename using the FieldFx labeler (learn mre n page 190). Learn mre abut Antenna and Cable files belw. Press Recall Antenna r Recall Cable t lad an Antenna r Cable file frm the specified Strage Device. SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 91

92 Strage Device Changes the device used t save r recall files. Chse frm Internal (default setting), USB (must be cnnected) r SD card. This is a different setting frm the Save/Recall Strage Device setting. Abut Antenna and Cable files Cable files are saved and recalled frm the Cables flder. Antenna files are saved and recalled frm the Antenna flder. If the flder des nt already exist n a USB r SD card, it is created autmatically befre string the file. All SA mde Antenna and Cable files are saved and recalled as *.csv files, which allws them t als be read by spreadsheet prgrams. The FieldFx can als read *.ANT (Antenna) files that were created frm lder Agilent Spectrum Analyzers. SA Mde cable r antenna (*.csv r *.ANT) files can NOT be edited in Data Link sftware. Learn mre abut Data Link sftware at: Hw t create a Cable file frm an S21 (NA mde) r an Insertin Lss (CAT mde) measurement 1. Measure the S21 r Insertin Lss f a cable. In NA mde, select either LgMag, Linear, r VSWR frmats. 2. Use Manage Flders t change the active flder t CABLES. Learn hw t manage flders n page Save the measurement as a *.csv file. Learn hw n page Select SA mde Crrectins, then recall the *.csv file fr crrectin. Tune & Listen (AM/FM) The Tune & Listen feature can be used t identify an interfering AM r FM signal. The demdulated AM r FM signal can be heard thrugh the internal speaker r thrugh headphnes using the 3.5 mm jack lcated n the FieldFx side panel. The Tune & Listen tuner is separate frm the SA display. This allws yu t listen t ne frequency while displaying a different range f frequencies. The Tune & Listen measurement alternates between nrmal SA sweeps fr the display and perfrming audi demdulatin at the Tune Frequency. See the Listen Time setting fr mre infrmatin. 92 FieldFx User s Guide

93 Tune & Listen ON with Tune Frequency indicated by a vertical bar (highlighted). Hw t select Tune & Listen Press Measure 1 Then Tune & Listen Then chse a demdulatin type. Select a setting based n the type f interfering signal yu suspect is being bradcast. Nne Turns Tune & Listen OFF AM Amplitude Mdulatin FM Narrw Frequency Mdulatin; Narrw bandwidth. Chse when interfering transmissin cnsist f vice r data. FM Wide Frequency Mdulatin; Wide bandwidth. Chse fr high quality music transmissins f FM bradcast radi. Tune Frequency The Tune & Listen tuner is separate frm the SA display. This allws yu t listen t ne frequency while displaying a different range f frequencies. Set the Tune Frequency using ne f three methds: 1. Selecting Preset, Mde Preset, r Meas Preset sets Tune Frequency t 3.0 GHz. 2. Specify Tune Frequency: Press Meas Setup 4 Then Tune Freq Enter a value using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Then select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page Using Mkr->Tune Freq Create a nrmal marker at the frequency f interest. Learn hw n page 174. Press Mkr->/Tls SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 93

94 Then Mkr->Tune Freq t change the Tune Frequency t that f the marker. Tip T imprve sund quality, try increasing pwer by reducing the Attenuatin setting and, if available, turn ON the Preamplifier. Learn hw n page 87. Listen Time While Tune & Listen is actively demdulating a signal, the SA des nt sweep and update the display. Listen Time sets the amunt f time that the FieldFx demdulates, then stps t perfrm a single sweep and update the display, then again demdulates. T select Listen Time: Press Meas Setup 4 Then Listen Time Enter a value using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Then select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Vlume Cntrl T increase r decrease the Vlume f the demdulated signal: Press Meas Setup 4 Then Vlume Enter a value in percent between 0 and 100 (ludest) using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Vlume can als be changed and easily muted frm the System menu. Learn mre n page 200. Demd ON and OFF T quickly stp the audi demdulatin and perfrm nly the nrmal SA sweeps, select the fllwing: Press Meas Setup 4 Then Demd ON OFF Independent Surce/Tracking Generatr This feature may require an ptin. Fr a cmprehensive list, view the FieldFx Cnfiguratin Guide at: A tracking generatr, a ppular ptin with Spectrum Analyzers, is a surce which always tracks the SA receiver. Like a traditinal tracking generatr, the Independent Surce feature can set the internal FieldFx surce t track the SA receiver frequency range. It can als set the internal surce t a CW frequency that is independent f the SA frequency. Independent Surce can be enabled ONLY when the FieldFx is in SA mde. T view the internal surce, yu must cnnect a cable r device between the RF Output cnnectr and the RF Input cnnectr. Hw t make Independent Surce Settings Press Measure 1 94 FieldFx User s Guide

95 Then Surce Surce Enable ON OFF NOTE ON Turns ON the internal surce. OFF Turns OFF the internal surce. Surce Mde Chse frm the fllwing: Tracking The internal surce sweeps simultaneusly (tracks) with the SA receiver ver the displayed frequency range, emulating NA mde measurements. Src is anntated n the screen. CW The surce is set t a CW frequency independent frm the SA setting. Srcw is anntated n the screen. Cupled CW The surce is set t a CW frequency, but that frequency tracks the SA receiver Center Frequency setting. Therefre, the signal always appears at center f the display. Srcp is anntated n the screen. Nrmalize ON OFF With Surce Enable ON and Surce Mde = Tracking, Nrmalize ON stres the current measurement trace int Trace 4 in View state as a reference trace. All subsequent trace measurements subtract this Trace 4 reference trace, and therefre becme relative t it. SrcN is anntated n the screen. Nrmalize is autmatically turned OFF when the frequency range r Reslutin is changed. Learn mre abut Trace Display States n page 106. Surce Pwer Sets the surce pwer level. Chse frm: Leveled Enter a value frm -45 dbm t 0 dbm using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. The surce pwer is reasnably flat acrss the frequency span. MAX The pwer level is set t the maximum achievable pwer level at each frequency. This results in the pwer level NOT being flat acrss the frequency span. Surce CW Freq Sets the CW frequency that is used when Surce Mde is set t CW. By default, the surce utput will turn ff mmentarily at the end f each SA sweep and every thirty secnds fr InstAlign. T cause the surce t stay ON at the end f each sweep, turn battery saver OFF. (Learn abut Battery Saver n page 204.) Press System 7 Then Preferences Then Battery Saver OFF T suspend InstAlign: (Learn abut InstAlign n page 107.) Press Cal 5 Then Amptd Alignment OFF SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 95

96 Reslutin Bandwidth (Res BW) In SA Mde, the Res BW prvides the ability t reslve, r see clsely spaced signals. The narrwer (lwer) the Res BW, the better the spectrum analyzer can reslve signals. In additin, as the Res BW is narrwed, less nise is measured by the spectrum analyzer ADC and the nise flr n the display lwers as a result. This allws lw level signals t be seen and measured. Hwever, as the Res BW is narrwed, the sweep speed becmes slwer. See Very Lng Sweep Times n page Hw t set Res BW Press BW 2. Then Res BW Then chse frm the fllwing: Aut Res BW is cupled t the frequency span. As the frequency span is narrwed, the Res BW is als narrwed prviding increased ability t reslve signals. T change this setting frm Man t Aut, press Res BW twice. Man Enter a Res BW value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Then press a multiplier if necessary r press Enter. The current Res BW setting is shwn at the bttm f the screen. #Res BW x.xx XHz ( # ) means manual setting. This setting culd impact the accuracy f the measurement. See Specificatins n page 232. NOTE The Res BW setting als affects the Sweep Type setting. Learn hw n page 97 Vide Bandwidth (Vide BW) Vide BW is a smthing peratin that is perfrmed after measurement data is acquired. The trace data is effectively smthed s that the average pwer level f the displayed nise is the same, but the peaks and valleys f adjacent data pints are smthed tgether. Mre smthing ccurs as the Vide BW is set lwer. Hwever, as the Vide BW is narrwed, the sweep speed becmes slwer. Hw t set VBW Press BW 2. Then Vide BW Then chse frm the fllwing:. NOTE Aut Cuples Vide BW t the ResBW in a 1-t-1 rati. Man Enter a Vide BW value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Then press a multiplier if necessary r press Enter. T change this setting frm Man t Aut, press Vide BW twice. The current Vide BW setting is shwn at the bttm f the screen. # VBW x.xx XHz ( # ) means manual setting. 96 FieldFx User s Guide

97 When the Res BW/Vide BW rati exceeds 10,000, a Meas UNCAL warning may appear t indicate that the Vide BW filter has reached the maximum capacity fr averaging. In Zer Span, the maximum Res BW/ Vide BW rati is 100. Sweep Type In SA mde, the FieldFx uses tw sweep types t prcess inputs signals. The sweep type that is currently being used (FFT r Step) is displayed in the lwerleft crner f the FieldFx screen. Fr a mre cmprehensive tutrial, see Spectrum Analysis Basics (App Nte 150) at Hw t set Sweep Type Press BW 2. Then Advanced Then Sweep Type Then chse frm the fllwing: Aut The FieldFx selects the mst efficient sweep type based n the Res BW. When Res BW is set t 200 khz and belw, FFT sweep type is selected. Abve 200 khz, Step sweep type is being perfrmed. FFT The FieldFx uses FFT sweep type regardless f the Res BW. Step The FieldFx uses Step sweep type regardless f the Res BW. This is useful fr capturing impulsive nise that may be generated frm nearby electrical equipment. IF Output The FieldFx IF (intermediate frequency) can be utput fr external signal prcessing. The signal is available frm the IF Out cnnectr n the FieldFx right-side panel. See the cnnectr n page 17. The IF Out signal, centered at apprximately MHz, is simply a dwncnverted versin f the RF Input signal that is present at the tuned frequency. While utputting an IF signal, the FieldFx stps perfrming the InstAlign prcess. Therefre, the amplitude f traces n the FieldFx screen is NOT accurate and Meas UNCAL appears n the screen t indicate this. Learn mre abut InstAlign n page 107. Learn mre abut the IF Output frequencies and bandwidths in the Supplemental Online Help: Hw t select IF Output The IF Output signal is useful nly in Zer Span. Learn mre abut Zer Span n page 99. At least ne sweep must be made in rder t tune the FieldFx. Press BW 2. Then Advanced Then IF Output Use SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 97

98 Then chse frm the fllwing: OFF N utput frm the IF Out cnnectr. Narrw The IF utput signal has apprximately 5 MHz bandwidth. Wide The IF utput signal has apprximately 25 MHz bandwidth. Sweep Acquisitin Available nly in nn-zer span measurements, when Sweep Acquisitin is set t Aut, the fastest sweep rate is achieved while maintaining full amplitude accuracy. Hwever, yu can adjust this setting in rder t increase the prbability f intercepting and viewing pulsed RF signals. Fr example, with SwpAcquisitin set t Aut a pulsed GSM signal is NOT visible n the FieldFx screen, as shwn in a blue trace in the fllwing image. While watching the trace, increase the SwpAcquisitin value until the pulse spectrum rises ut f the nise and reaches its maximum level. Increasing the SwpAcquisitin value beynd this pint nly slws the update rate (increases the actual Sweep time readut) but des nt imprve measurement quality. A GSM signal in a framed data frmat; timeslt zer ON; all thers OFF; PRF = 218Hz, Duty Cycle = 12.5%. The pulsed signal becmes visible n every sweep update with SwpAcquisitin = 50. Hw t set Sweep Acquisitin SwpAcquisitin is NOT an abslute measure f time, but a relative number between 1 (fastest) and 5000 (slwest) sweep time. The actual time that was required t cmplete a sweep is anntated n the screen. Press Sweep 3. Then SwpAcquisitin Aut Man. Then chse frm the fllwing: 98 FieldFx User s Guide

99 Aut Sweep is set t the fastest sweep pssible with the current settings. Man Enter a relative acquisitin value between 1 and 5000, where: 1 = Fastest sweep pssible 5,000 = Slwest sweep pssible # is shwn in frnt f the actual sweep time t indicate a manual setting. NOTE Sme Detectr and Vide Bandwidth settings will raise the Aut Sweep Acquisitin value greater than 1. In these cases, manually setting Sweep Acquisitin lwer than the Aut value may have NO effect. Measurement speed specificatins d NOT apply in Temperature Cntrl Mde. Learn mre n page 13. Learn mre abut SA mde SwpAcquisitin time in the Supplemental Online Help: Very Lng Sweep Times Tw primary settings are respnsible fr the sweep time: Res BW and SwAcquisitin. When the sweep time exceeds 1200 secnds (20 minutes), an infrmatinal message: Alert: Very lng sweep in prgress is anntated n the screen fr the duratin f the sweep. When the sweep time exceeds 4000 secnds (abut 1 hur), Meas UNCAL is anntated n the screen. Accuracy cannt be guaranteed. InstAlign is always perfrmed nly at the beginning f the sweep regardless f the sweep time. Learn mre abut InstAlign n page 107. Zer Span Measurements When setting the frequency span t Zer, there is NO spectrum f frequencies t display, s the X-axis units becmes Time. The SA becmes like a tunable scillscpe, with the center frequency being the frequency f interest. This capability is useful fr analyzing mdulatin characteristics, such as pulsed measurements. SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 99

100 GSM signal, framed data frmat, timeslt 0 and 3 n. Sweep Time is set t apprximately the frame interval. Press Single several times until the wavefrm sectin f interest is viewable and stable. Then markers can be used t measure the timeslt width and interval as shwn. Hw t set Zer Span Set Center t the frequency f interest then set Span t 0 Hz r select Zer/Last Span. Each key press tggles the frequency span between 0 Hz and the last specified frequency span. Hw t change Sweep Time in Zer Span. Press Sweep 3 Then SweepTime Enter a value using the numeric keypad. Sweep time is limited t 1000 secnds. Then select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Previus FieldFx versins limited the sweep time / ResBW settings. This restrictin is n lnger necessary with release A Learn mre abut SA mde Sweep Time in the Supplemental Online Help: Triggering External, Vide, and RF Burst triggering allws yu t initiate an SA mde sweep using an external event such as a signal burst. 100 FieldFx User s Guide

101 All three trigger types can be used in either Zer Span (time dmain) r FFT frequency sweeps. Learn mre abut Zer Span n page 99. Learn mre abut FFT n page 97. FFT Gating is available fr nn-zer span measurements. Learn mre abut FFT Gating n page 104. Trigger Type Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Settings Then Trig Type Then chse frm the fllwing: Free Run Triggering is prvided by the FieldFx internal circuitry. A new sweep begins when the previus sweep ends. External A sweep is triggered n an external TTL signal at the Ref In/Trig In cnnectr n the FieldFx tp panel. Chse t trigger n the rising slpe at abut 1.7 V r n the falling slpe at abut 1.0 V using the Trigger Slpe setting (belw). The fllwing tw selectins are similar in that they bth a trigger a sweep frm a signal at the SA RF Input cnnectr. Experiment with bth selectins t find the best trigger type fr yur applicatin. Vide A sweep is initiated when the displayed amplitude f an incming signal crsses the settable Trigger Level. This selectin can detect lwamplitude signals, but als has been filtered cnsiderably and may nt be a true representatin f the incming signal. RF Burst A sweep is initiated when the signal at the third IF (analg) stage crsses the settable Trigger Level. This selectin ffers a wider bandwidth and may be a better representatin f the incming signal than Vide trigger. Hwever, RF Burst is nt as sensitive t triggering n lw-level signals. Trigger Slpe Trigger Slpe determines which edge f an External, Vide, r RF Burst trigger signal initiates a sweep. Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Settings Then Trig Slpe Then chse frm the fllwing: Ps Sweep is triggered by the rising (psitive) edge f signal. Neg Sweep is triggered by the falling (negative) edge f signal. Trigger Delay After a valid trigger signal is received, the sweep begins after the specified Trigger Delay time. T see the rising edge f a repetitive signal which is triggered n that edge, enter a negative trigger delay value (als knwn as pre-trigger). Adjust the sweep time t include the pre-trigger time. SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 101

102 In Zer span, yu can use Trigger Psitin as an easy way t set Trigger Delay by psitining the trigger event n the FieldFx screen. Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Settings Then Trig Delay Enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Then select a multiplier key r press Enter. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Trigger Level Used with Vide and RF Burst triggering, a sweep is initiated when an incming signal crsses this level. The units depend n the Units setting. Learn mre n page 86. Vide Trigger Level is a zer span signal level cmparisn. Therefre, the sweep will trigger clse t the displayed level in zer span measurements. In nn-zer span measurements, prcessing can cause bradband signal energy t display at lwer pwer levels than the riginating time dmain signal. Therefre, yu may need t set the trigger level higher than the displayed level. RF Burst Trigger Level uses an alignment prcess which is perfrmed in the backgrund t set the detected signal level accuracy. Learn mre abut the alignment n page 108. Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Settings Then Trig Level Enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Then select a multiplier key r press Enter. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Aut Trigger Time While waiting fr a valid trigger signal, Wait is anntated in the tp left crner f the FieldFx screen. If a valid trigger signal is nt received befre the specified Aut Trig Time, a sweep will ccur autmatically. Enter 0 t set Aut Trigger OFF. When Aut Trigger is OFF, the FieldFx des NOT sweep unless a valid trigger signal is received. Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Settings Then AutTrig Time [current setting] Enter an Aut Trig Time using the numeric keypad. Then select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page FieldFx User s Guide

103 Trigger Psitin Available ONLY in zer span measurements, this setting is an easy way t autmatically set the Trigger Delay by psitining the trigger event (als knwn as T-zer) at any graticule alng the X-axis. With T-zer in the center f the screen, yu can zm in and ut by increasing r decreasing the sweep time. Using the Trigger Psitin and Sweep Time settings is a quick and efficient way t examine artifacts f a pulse, much easier than trying t set the Trigger Delay manually. When Trigger Psitin is set t Manual, the Trigger Delay sftkey is nt available. The amunt f Trigger Delay that is being used is displayed n the sftkey. The Trigger Psitin is anntated n the screen. Learn hw in the fllwing sectin. Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Settings Then Trig Psitin Aut: The psitin f T-zer is set by the trigger delay. Manual: Select, then enter a psitin value frm 0 t 10 using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. 0: T-zer ccurs at the left graticule. 5: T-zer ccurs at the center f the screen. 10: T-zer ccurs at the far right graticule. Then press Enter. Trigger Settings Anntatin Trigger settings are anntated n the FieldFx screen as highlighted in red in the fllwing image: Square: Trig Type (VidT), AutTrigger (a), Ps Slpe (/), Neg Delay (delay-) Hrizntal arrw: Trig Level (green hrizntal graticule at -20 dbm) Vertical arrw: Trig Psitin T-zer indicatrs (green arrws at 2 nd vertical graticule) SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 103

104 FFT Gating (Opt 238) Time-gated spectrum analysis allws yu t btain spectral infrmatin abut signals ccupying the same part f the frequency spectrum that are separated in the time dmain. Using an external trigger signal t crdinate the separatin f these signals, yu can perfrm the fllwing peratins: Measure any ne f several signals separated in time; fr example, yu can separate the spectra f tw radis time-sharing a single frequency. Measure the spectrum f a signal in ne time slt f a TDMA system. Exclude the spectrum f interfering signals, such as peridic pulse edge transients that exist fr nly a limited time. FFT Gating is a simple, efficient way t set the prper amunt f trigger delay and capture time s that signal artifacts f a repeating wavefrm r pulse can be examined in the frequency dmain. Learn mre abut trigger settings n page 100. Fr best results, Aut Trigger shuld be used with this feature t ensure that the sweep des nt wait indefinitely fr a trigger. Set Aut Trigger t a time that is lnger than the expected peridic rate f the signal. This is especially imprtant when using RF Burst r Vide triggering in wider spans, because the signal prviding thse triggers has limited bandwidth. Learn mre abut Aut trigger n page 102. Fr mre cnceptual infrmatin n this tpic, please refer t Spectrum Analysis Basics (App Nte 150) at pages Hw t set FFT Gating Create a nn-zer span measurement. Wider frequency spans take mre time t acquire. Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Settings Then FFT Gating Setup Then chse frm the fllwing: Gate View OFF ON When ON, a separate zer span measurement is displayed belw the nn-zer span windw. The gate view measurement helps t cnfigure the gate width and delay by revealing (with green markers) the lcatin f the gate relative t the trigger event. The zer span measurement is tuned t the center frequency f the nn-zer span measurement with abut 5 MHz f bandwidth. The Y-axis scale is the same fr bth windws. Gate View Time Set the X-axis span fr the nn-zer span windw. Enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. This value is anntated as Swp (nn) belw the windw. FFT Gating OFF ON When ON, the trigger type, gate width, and delay are applied t the nn-zer span measurement. The Res BW is set t a value that is inversely prprtinal t the gate width. 104 FieldFx User s Guide

105 Gate Width Set the width f the gating area within the nn-zer span windw. The gating area is indicated by tw vertical green lines. Enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Gate Delay Effectively mves the gating area left (negative delay) r right (psitive delay) relative t the trigger event. Enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. When yu have prperly setup the Gate Trigger, Width, and Delay using the Gate View measurement, yu can turn Gate View OFF t return t the full screen nnzer span measurement with FFT Gating ON, the RBW set, and the Trigger settings active. Single / Cntinuus / Restart NOTE The fllwing behavir is unique t SA Mde. This setting determines whether the FieldFx measures cntinuusly r nly nce each time the Single r Run / Hld +/- buttn is pressed. Use Hld / Single r t cnserve battery pwer r t allw yu t save r analyze a specific trace. Hw t set Single r Cntinuus Press Sweep 3. Then chse ne f the fllwing: Cntinuus ON Causes the SA t make cntinuus sweeps. This is the typical setting fr making measurements. Each Run / Hld +/- press causes the SA t tggle between cntinuus sweep and Hld. OFF Causes the SA t Hld. Each Run / Hld +/- r Single press causes the SA t make ONE sweep, then Hld. The Hld anntatin changes t an arrw --> while the sweep ccurs. Single Autmatically sets Cntinuus OFF and causes the SA t make ONE sweep, then Hld. Restart Resets the Average cunter t 1. When in Hld, causes the SA t make ONE sweep, then Hld. The Average cunter has is used with MaxHld and MinHld Trace States. Learn mre n page 107. Pints Pints is the number f measurements that are displayed alng the X-axis. The higher number f data pints, the better the ability t reslve clsely spaced signals and the slwer the sweep speed. Hw t set number f pints Press Sweep 3 Then Pints [current setting] Then chse frm: SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 105

106 Trace Display States In SA Mde yu can display up t fur f the fllwing types f trace states. All SA settings are applied t all displayed traces. A clr-cded legend fr displayed traces is visible in the left pane f the SA mde screen: W = Clear/Write; M = MaxHld; m = MinHld; A = Average; V = View Hw t display Trace States Press Trace 6. Then Trace 1,2,3,4 repeatedly t select a trace number t display. Traces are displayed in the fllwing clrs: Trace 1 Yellw Trace 2 Blue Trace 3 Orange Trace 4 Red Then State [current setting]. Then chse frm the fllwing Trace States: NOTE Clr /Wr (Clear/Write) Displays the actual measured data fr each sweep. MaxHld Displays the maximum respnse f the input signal at each data pint ver multiple sweeps. See als Average Cunt n page 107. MinHld Displays the minimum respnse f the input signal at each data pint ver multiple sweeps. See als Average Cunt n page 107. Average Each data pint is averaged ver multiple sweeps as set by the Average Cunt setting. Learn mre in fllwing Average Type sectin. View Displays and then hlds the last cmplete measurement trace n the screen. This is similar t string a trace in memry. Blank Displays n trace. Press Default All t return all traces t their default settings: Trace 1 (Clear/Write); all ther traces (Blank). Trace 4 data WILL be verwritten by the FieldFx when using the Independent Surce Nrmalize feature (page 92) r using Field Strength antenna r cable crrectins (page 89). Average Type In SA Mde, there are fur different prcesses in which Averaging is perfrmed: Average Traces Learn mre n page 106. Detectin Methd Averaging Learn mre n page 108. Nise Marker Averaging - Learn mre n page 110. Vide BW filtering (fr nn-zer Span measurements) - Learn mre n page 96. There are tw types f mathematical averaging that can be perfrmed. Select ONE f these types and it is used fr all f the abve averaging prcesses. 106 FieldFx User s Guide

107 Hw t set Average Type Press Meas Setup 4 Then chse frm the fllwing: Aut - The FieldFx chses the mst apprpriate type f averaging fr the current settings. When Detectin Methd is set t Average, a Nise Marker is present, r a Channel measurement is active, then Pwer Average is ALWAYS selected. Otherwise, Lg Average is selected. Lg Averaging Best fr displaying Trace Averaging. LgAv is shwn n the left side f the FieldFx screen when selected. Pwer (Linear) Averaging Best fr measuring true pwer levels. Used in Detectin Average and Nise Marker Average. Mathematically, trace nise is 2.5 db higher than when using Lg Average. PAvg is shwn n the left side f the FieldFx screen when selected. Average Cunt The Average Cunt setting is used mainly with the Average Trace State described abve. In this Trace State, the Average Cunt setting determines the number f sweeps t average. The higher the average cunt, the greater the amunt f nise reductin. When Trace (display) State is set t Average, MaxHld, r MinHld, the average cunter is shwn in the left edge f the screen belw the Average Type. Fr all three f these Trace States, when Sweep 3 Cntinuus is set t OFF, press Restart t reset the sweep cunt t 1, perfrm <n> sweeps, then return t Hld. Hw t set Average Cunt Press Meas Setup 4 Then Average Cunt Enter a value frm 1 t 10,000 using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter InstAlign Amplitude Alignment SA mde uses a prprietary amplitude alignment algrithm t make extremely accurate amplitude measurements ver the full frequency range f the FieldFx. When enabled (by default) the FieldFx perfrms an alignment prcess using the internal RF surce. Althugh sme sweeps are delayed, measurement results are never disturbed. If the Independent Surce is enabled fr yur measurement, it will be brrwed t perfrm the alignment. Again, the measurement results are nt disturbed. Learn abut the Independent Surce n page 94. The alignment prcess can be disabled. Yu may want t d this, fr example, if yu are analyzing the amplitude stability f a signal. SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 107

108 Hw t make Amplitude Alignment settings These settings d NOT survive a Preset r Mde Preset. Press Cal 5 Then Amptd Alignment Then chse frm the fllwing: Aut (Default setting) The alignment prcess is perfrmed every 300 secnds r when the temperature has changed abut 1 degree. It ccurs nly at the beginning f a sweep and takes abut 0.5 secnds t cmplete. OFF The alignment prcess is NOT perfrmed. Only factry crrectin values are used. Hld The alignment prcess is stpped, but the last alignment values are applied t subsequent sweeps. Amptd Align Nw An alignment is perfrmed nce and applied t subsequent sweeps. If the FieldFx is nt sweeping, a single sweep is triggered and alignment is perfrmed. Amptd? is anntated in the lwer left crner f the FieldFx screen when amplitude alignment is questinable because this setting is in Hld r OFF. RF Burst Amplitude Alignment RF Burst alignment calibrates the circuitry t prvide accurate external RF Burst triggering. Learn mre abut RF Burst triggering n page 100. When enabled (by default) the FieldFx perfrms an alignment prcess using the internal RF surce. Althugh sme sweeps are delayed, measurement results are never disturbed. If the Independent Surce is enabled fr yur measurement, it will be brrwed t perfrm the alignment. Again, the measurement results are nt disturbed. Learn abut the Independent Surce n page 94. The alignment prcess can be disabled. Yu may want t d this, fr example, if yu are analyzing the amplitude stability f a signal. Hw t make Burst Alignment settings These settings d NOT survive a Preset r Mde Preset. Press Cal 5 Then Burst Alignment Then chse frm the fllwing: Aut (Default setting) The alignment prcess is perfrmed every 45 minutes r when the temperature has changed abut 3 degrees. It ccurs nly at the beginning f a sweep and takes abut 0.5 secnds t cmplete. OFF The alignment prcess is NOT perfrmed. Only factry crrectin values are used. Hld The alignment prcess is stpped, but the last alignment values are applied t subsequent sweeps. 108 FieldFx User s Guide

109 Burst Align Nw An alignment is perfrmed nce and applied t subsequent sweeps. If the FieldFx is nt sweeping, a single sweep is triggered and alignment is perfrmed. Detectin Methd In SA Mde, the X-axis is cmprised f data pints, als knwn as buckets. The number f data pints is specified using the Reslutin setting. Learn hw n page 105. Regardless f hw many data pints are acrss the X-axis, each data pint must represent what has ccurred ver sme frequency range and time interval. Frm the frequency span f the measurement, the span f each data pint is calculated as (frequency span / (data pints-1)). The detectin methd allws yu t chse hw the measurements in each bucket are displayed. One bucket shwing Psitive peak, Sample, and Negative peak Detectin methds. Hw t set Detectin Methd The current Detectin methd is labeled n the left edge f the screen. When a methd is selected manually, a # precedes the label. Fr example: # Nrm means that Nrmal was selected frm the sftkeys. Press Trace 6 Then Detectr Then chse frm the fllwing: Aut Displays the mst apprpriate Detectin methd based n ther settings. [ # is NOT shwn] Nrmal [Nrm] Prvides a better visual display f randm nise than Psitive peak and avids the missed-signal prblem f the Sample Mde. Shuld the signal bth rise and fall within the bucket interval, then the algrithm classifies the signal as nise. An dd-numbered data pint displays the maximum value encuntered during its bucket. An evennumbered data pint displays the minimum value encuntered during its bucket. If the signal is NOT classified as nise (des NOT rise and fall) then Nrmal is equivalent t Psitive Peak. Psitive Peak [Pk] Displays the maximum value f all the measurements in each bucket. This setting ensures that n signal is missed. Hwever, it is nt a gd representatin f the randm nise in each bucket. SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 109

110 Negative Peak [NPk] Displays the minimum value f all the measurements in each bucket. Sample [Smp] Displays the center measurement f all the measurements in each bucket. This setting gives a gd representatin f the randm nise in each bucket. Hwever, it des nt ensure that all signals are represented. Average [#RMS] Displays the Rt Mean Squared (RMS) average pwer f all the measurements in each bucket. This is the preferred methd when making pwer measurements. Learn mre n page 183. Display Line A display line is a simple, hrizntal line that can be placed at any amplitude level n the SA screen. Use a display line as mental guide fr visual feedback. A display line is similar t a Limit Line, except that n PASS/FAIL testing ccurs. A display line is easier t create than a Limit Line. Learn abut Limit Lines n page 184. Hw t create and mve a Display Line Press Limit 8 Then Display Line OFF ON Display line with anntatin Then enter a Y-axis value using the arrws r the rtary knb, then press Enter. Or enter a value using the numeric keypad and press a suffix key r press Enter. Nise Marker Fr cmparisn purpses, electrnic nise measurements are ften displayed as thugh the measurement was made in a 1 Hz Res BW. Hwever, making an actual measurement at a 1 Hz Res BW is impssible, and at 10 Hz, extremely slw. A Nise Marker, unique t SA Mde, mathematically calculates the nise measurement as thugh it were made using a 1 Hz bandwidth. 110 FieldFx User s Guide

111 Several data pints (r buckets ) are averaged tgether t calculate the Nise Marker readut. T accurately measure nise, the Nise Marker shuld NOT be placed n, r t clse t, a signal. The distance frm a signal depends n several factrs. T knw if an accurate reading is being made, mve the Nise Marker until cnsistent measurements are displayed in adjacent data pints. In additin, when a Nise Marker is displayed, the Detectin methd is autmatically switched t Average and PAvg is shwn n the FieldFx screen. This ccurs nly when Detectin is set t Aut. Learn mre n page 107. With a Nise Marker present, the Res BW can be changed and the displayed nise flr will als change, but the Nise Marker readut will remain abut the same. Nise Markers can be used like regular markers. A Nise Marker is distinguished frm a regular marker by (1Hz) after the marker readut value. Learn mre abut regular markers n page 174. Hw t measure Nise with a marker Press Marker t create r select a Nrmal r Delta marker t use t measure Nise. Then Mre. Then Marker Functin Then Nise ON OFF. Band/Interval Pwer Marker A Band/Interval Pwer marker, unique t SA Mde, accumulates the pwer that is measured ver several adjacent data pints (r buckets ). The range f buckets being measured is displayed with vertical psts arund the marker. This Band Span value is selectable. This feature is very similar t a channel pwer measurement (page 115). When the frequency span is set t Zer span, the marker is referred t as an Interval marker because it averages pwer ver a specific time interval. In this case the range is specified as the Interval Span. Learn mre abut Zer span measurements n page 99. If the Detectin methd and Averaging type are set t Aut when yu enable a Band/Interval Pwer marker, the Detectin methd will change t Average (RMS) and Averaging type will change t Pwer average. Other Detectin methds r Averaging type settings will usually cause measurement inaccuracy. Learn mre abut Detectin methd n page 107, and Averaging Type n page 106. Summary: In Zer span, an Interval Pwer Marker yields the average pwer ver the specified time interval. In nn-zer span, a Band Pwer Marker yields the ttal pwer ver the specified frequency range. Hw t measure Band/Interval Pwer with a marker Press Marker t create r select a Nrmal r Delta marker t use t measure Band/Interval Pwer. Then press Mre SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 111

112 Then Marker Functin Then Band/Int Pwer Then Band (r Interval) Span Then chse frm the fllwing: Aut Measures pwer ver 5% f the displayed span, r ½ graticules. The Band Span is autmatically updated t remain at 5% when yu change the frequency span. Man Enter a frequency r time value using the arrws r the rtary knb, then press Enter. Or enter a value using the numeric keypad and select a frequency r time suffix. The Band Span remains at the frequency r time value that yu set as the span changes. Frequency Cunter at Marker Available in SA Mde ONLY. Use any existing marker t make highly-accurate frequency cunter readings. Fr highest accuracy, lck the FieldFx t a stable external frequency reference. Learn hw n page 209. When Frequency Cunter is ON, the FieldFx uses backgrund sweeps t zm n the signal, measure the signal peak with 1 Hz reslutin, and display the frequency f the signal peak in the marker anntatin area. The marker des nt mve t the signal peak. When Freq Cunter is ON, measurement sweeps are cnsiderably slwer. Hw t use Frequency Cunter Press Marker. Press Nrmal, Delta, r Peak, r select an existing marker t use as a frequency cunter. Lcate the marker smewhere n a CW signal. It des NOT have t be n the peak. Then Mre Then Freq Cunt ON With Freq Cunt ON, yu can scrll thrugh the existing markers that are lcated n a discrete CW signal, and read the frequency f the signal peak. Hwever, each frequency cunt update requires anther sweep. If the FieldFx is in HOLD, press Single t update the frequency cunt results. Time Zer Fixed Marker This feature was created t allw recall f vintage instrument states (lder than Rev. 7.0) that included Zer span sweep with a trigger delay and at least ne marker. Befre Rev. 7.0, these instrument states were saved and recalled with the equivalent f the ON state f this setting. The default setting is OFF. Learn mre abut Triggering with negative delay n page 100. Hw t set Time Zer Fixed Press Mkr->/Tls 112 FieldFx User s Guide

113 Then Mre Then Mkr Prperties Then Time Zer Fixed Then chse frm the fllwing: ON Time Zer is fixed at the left-edge f the screen. A marker in negative delay resides at this pint. This is the vintage behavir. OFF (default) Time Zer is lcated at the T-zer indicatrs. A marker in negative delay appears t the left f T-zer. Audi Beep at Marker Pwer When enabled, the Audi Beep feature emits a repetitive beep sund which varies in tne pitch and repetitin rate t indicate the relative pwer level f the active marker. The highest tne pitch and fastest beep rate ccurs when the marker Y-axis psitin is at the tp f the display. Cnversely, the lwest pitch and repetitin rate ccurs at the bttm f the display. Therefre, it is imprtant t scale the signals that yu intend t measure between the tp and bttm f the screen. Learn mre abut Scale n page 86. Audi Beep can be used with any marker type r functin, including Band/Interval Pwer. Learn mre n page 111. Hw t use Audi Beep Press Marker Optinally, press Marker t select an existing marker t use with Audi Beep. A marker will be created if ne des nt already exist. Then Mre Then Marker Functin Then Audi Beep ON OFF Audi Beep des NOT beep when the FieldFx is in Hld mde. While Audi Beep is ON, press Marker t tggle Audi Beep thrugh the existing markers. T set FieldFx speaker vlume cntrl, press System, then Vlume. Learn mre n page 200. Meas UNCAL Errr Meas UNCAL appears in the lwer-left crner f the screen when the FieldFx can NOT display accurate measurement results with the current settings. Usually, the part f the trace that is inaccurate is shwn at 200 db. The fllwing situatin can prduce Meas UNCAL: When the ResBW/VBW rati exceeds 10,000, causing the VBW filter t reach the maximum capacity fr averaging. SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 113

114 Old Data Indicatr (*) In SA mde, when the current trace des nt exactly match the anntatin that is n the screen, an asterisk is displayed in the upper-right crner f the screen graticule area. This wuld ccur, fr example, when the Res BW setting is changed while in sweep Hld mde. The anntatin is changed immediately, but the trace is nt updated until the next sweep ccurs. Therefre, the current data trace des nt match the screen anntatin. See the asterisk n page 81. Channel Measurements The fllwing Channel Measurements are ffered in SA Mde: Channel Pwer Occupied Bandwidth Adjacent Channel Pwer Rati The fllwing fur sectins (Radi Standards and Channel Measurements, Measurement Preset, Averaging, and Traces) are relevant fr ALL Channel Measurements. Radi Standards and Channel Measurements T tune the frequency range f any f the Channel Measurements using channels instead f frequency, first select a Radi Standard, then select Units = CHAN. Learn hw t select a Radi Standard and channels n page 84. When yu first select a Radi Standard, then select a Channel Measurement: With Units = FREQ selected, the center frequency and span will ALWAYS change t the full frequency range f that standard (Uplink and Dwnlink) t allw fr a quick scan f energy. The X-axis anntatin indicates the frequency range. With Units = CHAN selected, the FieldFx chses either the uplink r dwnlink band, and displays that range f frequencies. Yu can then tune within that Standard using Start CHAN, Stp CHAN, r Center CHAN. The X- axis anntatin indicates the frequency range. When yu first select a Channel Measurement, then select a Radi Standard, the BW, Offset, RRC, Integratin BW, and Span settings are changed t thse f the standard. In additin, Res BW can als change when set t Aut(cuple). Hwever, center frequency is NOT changed unless yu first select Units = CHAN. Measurement Preset Measurement Preset allws yu t easily reset any f the channel measurements t its default settings. The Center Frequency, Preamp ON OFF, RF Attenuatin, Markers, Limits, and Radi Standard settings are NOT reset. Hw t select Measurement Preset: Press Preset then Measurement Preset 114 FieldFx User s Guide

115 Averaging By default in ALL Channel measurements, averaging is enabled and set t display the average f the last 15 measurements. When enabled, this average setting is autmatically making the fllwing averaging settings in rder t prvide the mst accurate pwer measurements: Averaging Type is set t Pwer. Trace State is set t Average. Detectr is set t Average. Cunt is set t 15. Any f these settings can be changed manually during a Channel measurement. Learn mre abut these settings starting at page 106. T change Averaging: Press Meas Setup 4. Then Average Enable ON OFF OFF effectively sets the Average Cunt t 1. Then Average Cunt Enter a value between 1 and 10,000 using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter. Traces Only ne measurement trace can be displayed in Channel Measurements. Channel Pwer (CHP) Channel Pwer measures ttal pwer ver the specified Integrated BW. The Integratin Bandwidth (IBW) can be adjusted t measure the pwer ver multiple channels. Channel Pwer measurement; Chan 190 Dwnlink; GSM850 Radi Standard SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 115

116 The fllwing tw Channel Pwer levels are displayed: Channel Pwer - measures ttal pwer ver the specified Integrated BW. Pwer Spectral Density same measured pwer, but mathematically nrmalized t a 1 Hz bandwidth using the same algrithm as Nise Marker. Learn mre abut the Nise Marker n page 110. Hw t select Channel Pwer Press Measure 1 Then Channel Measurements Then Channel Pwer When Channel Pwer is selected, the fllwing settings are maintained frm a previus measurement: Center Frequency, Preamp ON OFF, and RF Attenuatin. Integratin Bandwidth When Channel Pwer is selected, vertical psts appear n the display t mark the current Integratin Bandwidth setting. The displayed Channel Pwer and Pwer Spectral Density values are measured and calculated ver the specified Integratin Bandwidth. By default, the displayed frequency span is autmatically cupled t the Integratin Bandwidth. As yu change the Integratin Bandwidth, the frequency span is adjusted s that the vertical psts appear t NOT mve. Hwever, when yu manually change the frequency span, the Integratin Bandwidth is n lnger cupled t the frequency span. When a Radi Standard is selected, the apprpriate Integratin Bandwidth is set autmatically. Learn mre abut Radi Standards n page 84. T change Integratin Bandwidth: Press Meas Setup 4 Then Integrating BW Enter a value between 100 Hz and 3 GHz using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter Other Channel Pwer Settings All relevant FieldFx settings are made autmatically t ensure the highest accuracy, such as ResBW, VideBW, and sweep (SwpAcquisitin) speed. These, and all ther SA Mde settings, can be changed manually in a Channel Pwer measurement. Learn abut Measurement Preset n page 114. Learn abut Averaging n page 115. Learn abut RRC Weighting n page FieldFx User s Guide

117 Occupied Bandwidth Occupied Bandwidth measures the pwer f the displayed frequency span and displays vertical psts at the frequencies between which the specified percentage f the pwer is cntained. The frequency span between the tw vertical psts is the Occupied Bandwidth. The Occupied Pwer, the pwer that is cntained between the tw psts, is als displayed in dbm. OBW measurement; Chan 190 Dwnlink; GSM850 Radi Standard Hw t select Occupied Bandwidth Press Measure 1 Then Channel Measurements Then Occupied BW When Occupied Bandwidth is selected, the fllwing settings are maintained frm a previus measurement: Center Frequency, Preamp ON OFF, and RF Attenuatin. Frequency Span Occupied BW is calculated frm pwer that is measured ver the entire displayed Frequency Span. The frequency span can be entered using arbitrary frequencies r by using a Radi Standard in cnjunctin with channel numbers. Learn hw t select a Radi Standard and channels n page 84. T change Frequency Span: Press Freq/Dist Then Freq Span Enter a value using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 117

118 Pwer Percent This setting specifies the percentage f ttal measured pwer t display between the vertical psts. The measurement defaults t 99% f the ccupied bandwidth pwer. The remaining pwer (1% f default setting) is evenly distributed;.5% f the pwer n the utside f each side f the vertical psts. T change Pwer Percent: Press Meas Setup 4 Then Pwer Percent Enter a value between 10 and using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter. Other Occupied Bandwidth Settings All relevant FieldFx settings are made autmatically t ensure the highest accuracy, such as ResBW, VideBW, and sweep (SwpAcquisitin) speed. These, and all ther SA Mde settings, can be changed manually in a Occupied Bandwidth measurement. Learn abut Measurement Preset n page 114. Learn abut Averaging n page 115. Adjacent Channel Pwer Rati(ACPR) ACPR measures the pwer f a carrier channel and the pwer in its adjacent (ffset) channels. The measurement results can help yu determine whether the carrier pwer is set crrectly and whether the transmitter filter is wrking prperly. Yu can measure the channel pwer in ne, tw, r three adjacent (ffset) channels n the lw frequency and high frequency side f the center channel. Limits can be used t quickly see if t much pwer is measured in the adjacent channels. 118 FieldFx User s Guide

119 GSM 850-Ch 251-Up with ne Offset. Red Freqs (Mhz) added t illustrate Offset and Integ BW. Data in the ACPR graphical chart is always presented in dbm fr the carrier, and dbc (db belw the carrier) fr the ffsets. This can NOT be changed. Use the Meas Type setting (next page) t change hw the data is presented in the table belw the graph. Hw t select ACPR Press Measure 1 Then Channel Measurements Then Adjacent Channel Pwer When ACPR is selected, the fllwing settings are maintained frm a previus measurement: Center Frequency, Preamp ON OFF, and RF Attenuatin. Frequency Range/Channel When a Radi Standard is selected, the apprpriate center frequency r channel and span is set autmatically. The frequency r channel number can then be changed frm the Freq/Dist menu. Learn hw t select a Radi Standard and channels n page 84. The frequency range f an ACPR measurement can als be entered using arbitrary frequencies. When a Radi Std is NOT selected, the center frequency f a previus measurement is maintained when ACPR is selected. SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 119

120 Integratin Bandwidth The Integratin Bandwidth f the carrier and ffsets is the frequency span ver which pwer is measured. T change Integratin Bandwidth: Press Meas Setup 4 Then Integrating BW Enter a value between 100 Hz and 100 MHz using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter Hw t define adjacent (Offset) channels An ffset represents a range f frequencies ver which pwer is measured. Yu can specify up t three ffsets. The frequency range fr each ffset is specified with an Offset Freq and Integ BW. Each ffset that is created has a Lwer (carrier MINUS Offset Freq) and Upper (carrier PLUS Offset Freq) set f frequencies. Press Meas Setup 4 Then Offsets Press Offset t select an ffset. Then Offset State t set that ffset ON r OFF. Select Offset Freq This is the difference between the carrier center frequency and the center frequency f the ffset channel. Then enter a value using the numeric keypad. Select Offset Integ BW This is the frequency range ver which pwer is measured in that ffset; half f the range belw and half abve the Offset Freq. Hw t set limits fr adjacent channels Yu can set a unique threshld pwer fr each f the ffsets that will cause a FAIL indicatin (RED bar). This ccurs when the calculated dbc pwer (n tp f the ffset bar) is ABOVE the specified level. T set limits, with an ACPR measurement n the screen: Press Limit 8 Then Offset (1,2,3) Then chse frm the fllwing: Lwer Offset Sets a limit fr the lwer-frequency ffset. Upper Offset Sets a limit fr the higher-frequency ffset. Then enter a value using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Then Limit Test ON OFF Measurement Type This setting determines hw the measured carrier and ffset pwer levels in the table are presented. (Data in the graphical chart is always presented in dbm fr the carrier and dbc fr the ffsets.) 120 FieldFx User s Guide

121 T select Meas Type: Press Meas Setup 4. Then Mre Then Meas Type Then chse frm the fllwing: Ttal Pwr Ref Integrated carrier pwer is represented in dbm, and relative pwers between ffsets and carrier are represented as dbc (db belw the carrier). PSD Ref (Pwer Spectral Density) Integrated carrier pwer is nrmalized t a 1 Hz density as dbm/hz using a similar algrithm as Nise Marker. Learn mre abut the Nise Marker n page 110. Fr bth Meas Types, chse the reference fr the ffset data. Aut db r dbc value is cmputed by subtracting the measured carrier pwer frm the measured ffset pwer. Man db r dbc value is cmputed by subtracting the entered RefValue frm the measured ffset pwer. Press Ref Value Then enter a value t be used t reference the data using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Other ACPR Settings All relevant FieldFx settings are made autmatically t ensure the highest accuracy, such as ResBW, VideBW, and sweep (SwpAcquisitin) speed. These, and all ther SA Mde settings, can be changed manually in a ACPR measurement. Learn abut Measurement Preset n page 114. Learn abut Averaging n page 115. RRC Weighting RRC, r Rt-Raised-Csign weighting, is ffered with Channel Pwer and ACPR measurements. When RRC Weighting is applied t transmitted and received pwer, the edges f the channel are smthed t help prevent interference. T accurately measure a channel that has RRC weighting, set the same value f RRC weighting as that used in the transmitter and receiver. Channel pwer measurement with.22 RRC applied SA (Spectrum Analyzer) Mde 121

122 RRC Weighting is set and enabled autmatically when included in a selected radi standard. T set and enable RRC Weighting: Press Meas Setup 4 Then RRC Weighting ON OFF Then Mre Then RRC Alpha [current setting] Enter a value between 0 (n smthing) and 1 (mst smthing) using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. A standard level f filtering is.22. Press Enter 122 FieldFx User s Guide

123 Interference Analyzer (SA Mde) - Optin 236 Optin 236 prvides Spectrgram display, Waterfall display, and Recrd/Playback.. In this Chapter Spectrgram and Waterfall Displays Spectrgram Display Cmmn Waterfall and Spectrgram Settings 125 Waterfall Display Recrd Playback Abut Sessins Abut State and User Tags Hw t Recrd a Sessin Hw t Playback a Sessin Recrding Cnfiguratin Playback Cnfiguratin Manage Sessins Recrd Playback Example Spectrgram and Waterfall Displays NOTE Spectrgram and Waterfall displays prvide a visual histry f the measured spectrum. Each display type can be used t lcate intermittent signals r t view signal levels ver time. Spectrgram is a single hrizntal line f clr-cded pwer while Waterfall uses a 3-D clr-cded display. The functinal difference between these tw displays is that Spectrgram prvides less trace detail than Waterfall display. Hwever, it als allws mre traces t be viewed. These tw displays can NOT be used with Channel Measurements. Althugh this dcument refers t past traces as recrds these traces are nt saved in Spectrgram and Waterfall displays. They are nly drawn n the FieldFx screen. Spectrgram Display Spectrgram draws the mst recent trace recrd at the tp f the stack f previusly-drawn trace recrds. Drawing the live trace n the display is ptinal. Interference Analyzer (SA Mde) - Optin

124 Spectrgram display- Overlay view- with time markers 23 secnds apart. The fllwing settings all cntribute t the sweep time f an individual trace, and therefre, the ttal elapsed time that can appear n the screen in Spectrgram display: Frequency Range. Learn mre n page 83. Reslutin BW and Vide BW. Learn mre n page 92 Sweep Time (Acquisitin). Learn mre n page 97. Reslutin (Number f Pints). Learn mre n page 105. Hw t select Spectrgram Press Meas 1 Then Interference Analysis Then Spectrgram Hw t mdify the Spectrgram Yu can change hw the spectrgram is displayed relative t the data trace. This setting affects the ttal number f trace recrds that can be displayed. Press Meas Setup 4. Then Spectrgram Settings Then Spectrgram View Then chse frm the fllwing: Overlay Displays the data trace ver the spectrgram with NO graticules. Ttal trace recrds: 340. Full Screen Displays the spectrgram with NO data trace. Ttal trace recrds: 340. Tp Displays the data trace abve the spectrgram. Ttal trace recrds: 130. Bttm Displays the data trace belw the spectrgram. Ttal trace recrds: FieldFx User s Guide

125 Hw t Restart the Spectrgram Press Sweep 3 then Restart Hw t create Time Markers Use Time Markers t determine the elapsed time between any tw displayed recrds. The mst recent recrd appears at the tp f the screen. Press Meas Setup 4 Then Time Markers Then Time Then enter a value frm 0 (the mst recent sweep recrd) t the maximum value, using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. A indicates the Time Marker. Then Delta Then enter a value frm 0 (the mst recent sweep recrd) t the maximum value, using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. A indicates the Delta Marker. At the current sweep speed, the difference in time between these tw markers appears at the upper-right crner f the view as Delta Time: hh:mm:ss Sec. An invalid (very large number) appears when a trace recrd is nt available at ne r bth f these markers. Averaging Averaging can be enabled n the underlying measurement. Press Trace 6 then State [Average]. Learn mre n page 106. Cmmn Settings fr Waterfall and Spectrgram NOTE Set Red and Blue Limits The clrs displayed n the Waterfall and Spectrgram represent the varius measured pwer levels: Red = Highest pwer levels Blue = Lwest pwer levels The full Red-t-Blue clr spectrum is visible nly with Indr display clrs. Learn mre n page 201. Adjust the Red and Blue limits t the pwer levels that yu expect t measure. The Blue limit must always be less than the Red limit. Press Meas Setup 4. Then Spectrgram / Waterfall Settings Then chse frm the fllwing: Red Limit Using the arrws, rtary knb, r keypad, select the HIGHEST pwer level that yu expect t measure. This pwer level, and thse measured higher than this level, appear Red. Interference Analyzer (SA Mde) - Optin

126 Blue Limit Using the arrws, rtary knb, r keypad, select the LOWEST pwer levels that yu expect t measure. This pwer level, and thse measured lwer than this level, appear Blue. Hw t Restart the Spectrgram Press Sweep 3 then Restart Averaging Averaging can be enabled n the underlying measurement. Press Meas 4 then Average Type. Learn mre n page 106. Measurement Preset Measurement Preset resets ONLY the Spectrgram and Waterfall display settings. It des nt reset the measurement settings. Press Preset Then Meas Preset Waterfall Display NOTE The live trace is always drawn n a Waterfall display. Older trace recrds scrll up frm the displayed trace and eventually ff the screen. Because f this, lcate the live trace n the bttm f the screen using the scale and reference settings. Learn mre n page 86. Althugh this dcument refers t past traces as recrds these traces are nt saved. They are nly drawn n the FieldFx screen. Waterfall display- mderate angle- with time markers 1 minute apart. The fllwing settings all cntribute t the sweep time f an individual trace, and therefre, the ttal elapsed time that can appear n the screen in Waterfall display: Frequency Range. Learn mre n page 83. Reslutin BW and Vide BW. Learn mre n page FieldFx User s Guide

127 Sweep Time (Acquisitin). Learn mre n page 97. Reslutin (Number f Pints). Learn mre n page 105. Waterfall Angle This setting allws yu t shw mre r less detail. Mre detail prvides fewer (time) recrds. Press Meas Setup 4 Then Spectrgram Settings Then Waterfall Angle Then chse frm the fllwing: Mderate Cmprmise between detail and number f recrds. Steep Least detail with highest number f recrds. Gradual Mst detail with lwest number f recrds. Wide Angle Mderate angle with increased space between recrds. Learn hw t set Red and Blue Limits n page 125. Recrd Playback Recrd Playback allws yu t recrd SA trace sweeps and play them back at a later time. Use this feature t mnitr spectrum activity ver a perid f time. Yu can recrd traces cntinuusly, recrd a specified number f traces (segments), r recrd when triggered by a specified pwer level. Traces can be recrded frm, r played back int, any measurement type (such as Channel Pwer r Occupied BW) r any display type (such as Spectrgram and Waterfall). When GPS is enabled and displayed, the current lcatin and elevatin are saved and played back with traces. Recrdings can be saved t the FieldFx Internal memry, an SD Card, r a USB flash drive. Abut Sessins A Recrding Sessin is a cllectin f recrded traces and the instrument states that generated them. Befre recrding can ccur, a new sessin must be initiated r an existing sessin must be pened. Sessins can later be pened fr playing r cntinued recrding. Only ne sessin can be pen at a time. Yu clse the sessin when finished recrding r playing. A sessin is als clsed when the FieldFx is Preset (r Mde Preset), an Instrument State is recalled, r when Mde is changed frm SA. Each sessin is saved as a flder cntaining a set f files n the specified strage device. Hw lng can a recrding sessin last? There are many variables that determine the pssible length f a recrding sessin. But ne key variable is the amunt f available memry. Interference Analyzer (SA Mde) - Optin

128 When a sessin is pened r a new sessin is initiated, an estimate is made f the maximum number f traces that can be saved based n the available disk space and the current number f data pints (reslutin). Recrding will stp when that number is reached. This estimate always maintains 4 MB f available disk space n the specified strage device. Yu can decrease the number f traces t further limit recrding. The reslutin setting can NOT be changed after a sessin is pened. T maximize the amunt f space that is available, save recrded traces t a USB Flash drive r SD card. Learn hw in Manage Sessins n page 133. Yu can determine the length f time ver which recrding can ccur by setting the Recrd Interval (the time between recrded traces) and ther settings. Learn mre in Recrding Cnfiguratin n page 131. T view and edit the maximum number f recrds Just after pening r initiating a sessin... Press Sessin Data Then Trace Recrd Limit <n> (n = Max number f traces that can be recrded). Clear All Recrds Empties that sessin f recrded traces. Learn mre in Manage Sessins n page 133. FieldFx Setting Changes during Recrd and Playback During Recrding When any f the fllwing State settings are changed during recrding, the State cunter is incremented (see Abut State and User Tags n page 129) and the settings are saved t the Sessin file alng with the first trace t be recrded with the new setting. During playback, the trace and display anntatin will reflect the change n the screen. State settings: Frequency Range, Reslutin BW, Vide BW, Zer Span Sweep Time, Sweep Acquisitin, Preamp On/Off, Attenuatin, Detectr, Average Type, Trigger Settings, Independent Surce. Other display settings, such as Scale and Reference Level, can als be changed during recrding but are nt saved with the sessin file. Think f these as settings that help YOU see the recrding and playback activity. They d NOT change the data that is recrded. During Playback The State setting changes listed abve are NOT allwed during playback. Hwever, all ther display settings can be changed during playback t help yu analyze the recrded data. The recrdings can be played int different measurements such as Channel Pwer r Occupied BW. When the recrded data is nt cmpatible with the measurement type, a MEAS UNCAL message will appear n the screen. The data can als be played back in Spectrgram and Waterfall displays. 128 FieldFx User s Guide

129 Recrd/Playback Exceptins Markers can be activated and mved t help analyze recrded data. Hwever, marker psitin cntrl is nly available when playback is Paused. Field Strength Crrectins is saved with the sessin file and it is als allwed during playback. Learn abut this Field Strength Crrectins n page 89. Frequency Cunter at Marker is NOT allwed during Recrding r Playback. Learn abut this feature n page 112. Abut State and User Tags When any f the State settings (listed abve) are changed during a recrding, a state tag is inserted at the first trace number t be recrded with the new setting. In additin, yu can insert a User Tag at any time during a recrding sessin t indicate an external event, such as when an antenna is mved. During playback, yu can mve quickly t any f these tags, r scrll thrugh these tags. A symbl is used n the screen anntatin t distinguish a User Tag frm a State Tag when scrlling thrugh tags during playback. NOTE Screen Anntatin During a recrd r playback sessin, the fllwing is displayed in the tp-left area f the screen: AutSessin02: 92/95 (state 4/5)_*_ Sep :15:15 AM where: AutSessin is an aut-generated name fr sessins. 02 is the aut-generated number, incremented with each new sessin. The name can be changed using Manage Sessins. Learn mre n page /95 is the current and ttal trace number: currently trace is 92 f 95 ttal traces. state 4/5 is the current and ttal state tag r user tag number: 4 f 5 ttal tags. * (Asterisk) indicates that a state has changed. # (Pund) indicates that a User Tag has been inserted. Sep is the date and time f recrding. When GPS is enabled and displayed, the current lcatin and elevatin are anntated at the bttm f the playback display. Learn mre abut GPS n page 206. If Recrding r Playback is nt ccurring when yu think it shuld, check the fllwing: Is the sweep in HOLD? (upper-left anntatin) Is Recrding r Playback Paused? (mid-left anntatin) Is the Recrd r Playback Interval set t a lng delay? (Cnfiguratin settings.) Interference Analyzer (SA Mde) - Optin

130 Hw t Recrd a Sessin Press Trace 6 Then Recrd Playback Setup Optinally set reslutin (pints). Learn hw n page 105. This can NOT be changed after a sessin is pened. Then either: New Sessin OR Recall Sessin then Open and select a sessin. Then Recrder Player Then Recrd REC is displayed in the left f screen graticules. During recrding, chse frm the fllwing: Pause Resume Temprarily halts recrding until pressed again. The incming trace cntinues t sweep. Press again t cntinue recrding. Stp Immediately stps recrding. Then chse frm the fllwing: Press Play t start replaying the recrding frm the beginning. Press Recrd t cntinue recrding. User Tag Press t insert a User Tag at the current recrded trace. This allws yu t quickly mve t this lcatin during playback. Learn mre in Abut State and User Tags n page 129. Hw t Playback a Sessin Press Trace 6 If the sessin is already pen, skip the fllwing step. Otherwise: Then Recrd Playback Setup Press Recall Sessin Then select a sessin t playback and press Open. Then Recrder Player Then Play PLAY is displayed in the left f screen graticules during playback. When the end f the recrding is reached, playback begins again at trace 1 and cntinues t lp indefinitely. During playback, chse frm the fllwing: Pause Resume Temprarily halts playback. Then chse frm the fllwing: Pause Resume Press t cntinue playing. Playback State/Tag Allws yu t cntinue playback frm a state tag, r scrll thrugh the state tags. Enter a value between 1 and the ttal number f state tags using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Learn mre in Abut State and User Tags n page FieldFx User s Guide

131 Playback Trace Activated autmatically when Paused. Allws yu t cntinue playback frm a specific trace, r scrll thrugh traces manually. Enter a value between 1 and the ttal number f traces using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Stp Immediately stps playback. Then chse frm the fllwing: Play Start playback frm trace 1. Recrd Resume recrding frm the last recrded trace. Recrd Playback Setup Return t the setup menu t change Cnfiguratin settings r Clse the sessin. Recrding Cnfiguratin T change Recrding Cnfiguratin settings: Press Trace 6 Then Recrd Playback Setup Then New Sessin r Recall an existing sessin. Then Recrding Cnfiguratin Then chse frm the fllwing: Recrd Time Sets the amunt f time t recrd traces. Default is MAX, which is t recrd indefinitely. Enter a value between 1s and 1 Ms (millin) secnds using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. When set, a timer appears during recrding in the lwer-left crner which cunts DOWN frm the specified time. Recrd Surce Sets where, in the FieldFx data flw, data is recrded. Learn mre abut Recrd Surce n page 132. Chse frm the fllwing: RawMeas Recrds raw measurement data. Trace 1,2,3,4 Recrds data frm the crrespnding trace in its current state. Recrd Interval Sets the amunt f time t wait between individual trace recrdings. Default is MIN, which is t wait 0 secnds (recrd traces as fast as pssible). Enter a value in secnds between 0 (n delay) and 10,000 secnds - abut 3 hrs) using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. Segment Cunt Sets the number f traces t recrd, after which the recrding will autmatically pause. Press Pause/Resume r Recrd t capture anther N traces, r Stp t end recrding. Default is OFF, which is NO limit t the number f traces t be recrded. When set, a cunter appears in the lwer-left crner which cunts UP t the specified number f recrdings. FreqMaskTrigger OFF ON Sets the pwer level which will trigger a recrding. Set these pwer levels (mask) exactly as yu wuld set Limit Lines. (Learn hw n page 184.) With Recrd ON, when any data pint measurement is higher than an upper limit, r lwer than a lwer limit, recrding begins. See Frequency Mask Trigger Cnfiguratin in the fllwing sectin t learn hw t cnfigure the mask. Interference Analyzer (SA Mde) - Optin

132 Typically yu wuld use FreqMaskTrigger with Segment Cunt, but it can als be used with Recrd Time and Recrd Interval. When used with Segment Cunt: When a mask limit is exceeded, subsequent traces are recrded until the specified segment cunt is reached. Once segment cunt is reached, exceeding anther mask limit will again cause traces t be recrded until the segment cunt is reached, and s frth. T recrd nly thse traces that exceed the limit, set Segment Cunt t 1 T recrd ALL traces after a limit is exceeded, set Segment Cunt OFF. When used with Recrd Time, the timer cunts dwn even when traces are nt being recrded (limits are nt being exceeded). Recrding starts when a limit is exceeded and stps when the timer reaches 0. When used with Recrd Interval, a trace is recrded when a limit is exceeded, then n recrdings during the specified wait interval, then the next trace is recrded, fllwed by anther time delay, and s frth. This pattern repeats indefinitely if Segment Cunt is OFF, r (if ON) until Segment Cunt is reached. Frequency Mask Trigger Cnfiguratin NOTE NOTE Create r recall a Frequency Mask t be used with the FreqMaskTrigger feature. The Mask file is saved t, and recalled frm, the Save /Recall Strage Device lcatin NOT frm the Recrd Playback Strage Device lcatin. These are tw different settings. Learn hw t set the Save /Recall Strage Device n page 192. A mask that is in use during a recrding is NOT saved with the recrding and des NOT autmatically appear during playback. Like Limits Lines, it is saved and recalled with a state file. Althugh they are created in the same manner, Limit Line files and FreqMask files can NOT be used interchangeably. Press Trace 6 Then Recrd Playback Setup Then New Sessin r Recall an existing sessin. The current mask appears as sn as a sessin is pened. Then FreqMaskTrigger Cnfiguratin Then chse frm the fllwing Edit Mask Create r mdify the current mask. Learn hw t edit the Mask / Limit Line table n page 184. Save Mask Saves the current mask t a file. Recall Mask Lads a mask file. Recrd Surce The simplest way t use Recrd Playback is t recrd RawMeas data, which is can then be played back int all f the current Trace States. Hwever, fr mre cmplicated prcessing, refer t the fllwing diagram. This illustrates where in the FieldFx data flw data is recrded and played back. Fr this discussin, it is imprtant t understand Trace States. Learn mre n page FieldFx User s Guide

133 FieldFx Data Flw and Recrd Playback data pints Data can be recrded at the Raw Meas blck where data is acquired after ResBW, VideBW, and Detectr prcessing, but befre any trace state prcessing. Data can be recrded frm Traces 1,2,3, r 4 which includes the trace state (Max Hld, Min Hld, and s frth. Recrding frm a Clear/Write trace yields exactly the same data as recrding frm the Raw Meas blck. Data is ALWAYS played back at the same lcatin in the data flw: just after the Raw Meas blck, thrugh all currently active Traces, and nt the display. See an example using Recrd Playback with Max Hld traces n page 134. Playback Cnfiguratin By default, trace sweeps are played back as fast as the trace can be drawn n the screen. The fllwing setting allws yu t slw playback. In additin, yu can manually scrll thrugh individual traces using Playback Trace, r scrll thrugh State and User Tags using Playback State/Tag. Learn mre in Hw t Playback a Sessin n page 130. T slw playback f a sessin Recrd a new sessin r Open an existing sessin. Press Playback Cnfiguratin Then Playback Interval Enter a value in secnds between 0 (n delay) and 100 using the numeric keypad, arrws, r the rtary knb. After using the keypad, select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Press Enter Manage Sessins Press Trace 6 Then Recrd Playback Setup The fllwing selectins are available ONLY when a sessin is NOT pen. Then Strage Device t select the media which stres the sessins t be managed. This is a different setting frm the Save/Recall Strage Device setting. Interference Analyzer (SA Mde) - Optin

134 Then chse frm the fllwing: Internal FieldFx memry (default) SD Card An external SD Card (must be inserted) USB An external USB flash drive (must be inserted) Then Manage Sessins Then chse frm the fllwing: Name Using the FieldFx labeler, change the name f the sessin. AutSessin (n) is the default name where (n) is the next-available number. Learn hw t use the labeler n page 190. Srt Arrange the listing f sessins by Name, by Date, r by (file) Size. Delete After a cnfirmatin prmpt, remves the cntents f the selected sessin frm the list. Cpy Cpies the selected sessin t a different strage device, r the same strage device with Cpy_ appended t the beginning f the name. Cpy All Cpies ALL f the listed sessins t a different strage device, r the same strage device with Cpy_ appended t the beginning f the names. Recrd Playback Example The fllwing Interval Recrding example shws hw yu can recrd spectral activity ver a lnger perid f time with less trace strage. Press Trace 6 then, with Trace = 1, press State then Max Hld Then Recrd Playback Setup Then New Sessin Then Recrding Cnfiguratin Then Recrd Surce t Trace1 Then Recrd Interval t 10 s(secnds). Then Back Then Recrder Player Then Recrd At the end f each 10 secnd recrd interval, the Max Hld trace is recrded and the Max Hld prcessing is reset fr the next 10 secnd recrd interval. Then Stp t end the recrding. This sessin can be played back int any Trace State. Fr example: Play the Max Hld recrding int a Clear/Write trace t see the data exactly as it was recrded. Press Trace 6 then with Trace = 1 and press State then Clr/Wr Then Recrd Player Then Play 134 FieldFx User s Guide

135 Play the Max Hld recrding int a Max Hld trace t shw the accumulatin f Max Hld activity ver the entire recrding. Press Trace 6 then with Trace = 1 and press State then Max Hld Then Recrd Player Then Play Interference Analyzer (SA Mde) - Optin

136 Reflectin Mde (SA Mdels) This feature may require an ptin. Please view the FieldFx Cnfiguratin Guide at: Reflectin Mde prvides 1-prt scalar reflectin measurements in selected FieldFx SA-Only mdels. The FieldFx surce is ruted internally t Prt 1 and used t stimulate a Device Under Test (DUT). The energy that is reflected ff the DUT is measured and displayed n the screen. SA mde reflectin measurements are very similar t CAT mde reflectin measurements. Althugh SA mde reflectin measurements are CalReady, ther CAT mde calibratin types are NOT ffered. Learn mre abut CalReady n page 65. In this Chapter Measurement Selectin Nrmalize The fllwing settings are available exactly as they functin in CAT mde: Frequency Range Scale Settings Averaging Single/Cntinuus Reslutin Sweep Time Output Pwer Interference Rejectin Markers Limit Lines FieldFx User s Guide

137 Reflectin Mde Settings Select Reflectin Mde befre making any setting in this chapter. Hw t select Reflectin Mde Press Mde Then Reflectin Measurement Selectin Hw t select a Reflectin Mde Measurement Learn mre abut these tw measurements in the Supplemental Online Help: Press Measure 1 Then chse ne f the fllwing: These sftkeys als appear after Reflectin Mde is selected. Return Lss 1-prt scalar reflectin measurement that displays the amunt f incident signal energy MINUS the amunt f energy that is reflected. The higher the trace is n the screen, the mre energy being reflected back t the FieldFx. VSWR (Vltage Standing Wave Rati als knwn as SWR) 1-prt reflectin measurement that displays the rati f the maximum reflected vltage ver the minimum reflected vltage. The higher the trace is n the screen, the mre energy being reflected back t the FieldFx. Nrmalize Nrmalizatin can be used t effectively Zer a trace which remves frequency respnse errrs intrduced by the cmpnents f the test setup befre making the measurement. T nrmalize a reflectin measurement, the DUT is remved and a knwn device is cnnected t Prt 1. When yu chse Nrmalize, the displayed trace is stred int memry and then the displayed data is divided by the memry trace. The displayed data trace nw shws the difference between the stred memry respnse and the measured respnse. Yu culd nrmalize while measuring the reflectin respnse f any type f device. Fr example, the device culd be: A Lad (shwing minimum reflectin) An Open r Shrt (with maximum reflectin) A glden DUT. Hw t perfrm Nrmalizatin T Prt 1, cnnect a knwn device (usually an Open r Shrt) t which reflectin measurements are t be nrmalized. Press Trace 6 Then Nrmalize Reflectin Mde (SA Mdels) 137

138 NOTE The yellw data trace displays the current measurement with trace math applied. The math peratin symbl [D/M] is displayed n the lwer left crner f the screen. Learn mre abut Trace Math n page 187. Data interplatin is NOT supprted. If the Reslutin setting is changed with Trace Math enabled, the FieldFx will disable the math peratin. 138 FieldFx User s Guide

139 Built-in Pwer Meter Mde - Optin 310 Built-in Pwer Meter (als knwn as Channel Pwer Meter) uses the SA input cnnectr t make quick and simple pwer measurements ver a selectable frequency band. A pwer sensr is NOT required. In this Chapter Set Frequency Radi Standard Attenuatin See Als The fllwing Built-in Pwer Meter settings are identical t the standard Pwer Meter settings: Set Scale Set Relative and Offset Pwer Set Display Units Set Averaging Single/Cntinuus Set Limits The fllwing Built-in Pwer Meter settings are identical t SA Mde settings: Radi Standard InstAlign Amplitude Alignment Built-in Pwer Meter Settings Select Built-in Pwer Meter Mde befre making any setting in this sectin. Built-in Pwer Meter Mde - Optin

140 Hw t select Built-in Pwer Meter Mde Press Mde Then Pwer Meter (Built-in) CAUTION Please bserve the RF IN prt damage level. +27 dbm (320 mw) average +33 dbm peak (2 W) <10μs +50 VDC Frequency/ Span / Step Valid Built-in Pwer Meter measurements can be made ver the entire frequency range f the FieldFx. Althugh it is pssible t enter a center frequency belw the FieldFx minimum frequency, the LO feed-thru f the internal SA hardware will invalidate these Built-in Pwer Meter measurements. The measurement span (als knwn as Channel Width and Integratin BW) is the frequency range, half abve and half belw the center frequency, ver which pwer is detected and displayed. The maximum measurement span is 100 MHz. Hw t enter center frequency, step size, and span The default frequency is 50 MHz. Press Freq/Dist. Then Frequency. Then Center Then type a value using the numeric keypad. Then press a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. The current frequency (f) is shwn n the FieldFx screen. Optinally, use the arrws t quickly change Center frequency. The size f the frequency step can als be changed. Press CF Step then type a step size value using the numeric keypad, then select a multiplier key. Optinally press Span (Ch Wid) Type a value using the numeric keypad. Then press a multiplier key. The default span is 2 MHz. The maximum span is 100 MHz. The current span setting is shwn as the dividend in the digital display. Fr example: -10 dbm / 1.00 MHz Radi Standard A Radi Standard can used t integrate pwer within specific radi channels. When a Radi Standard is selected, the Span setting is autmatically cupled t the defined Channel Width fr that standard. (Width is the same fr all channels within a standard.) Als, Unit is set t Chan and CF is set t the nearest specific Channel defined in the standard. Learn mre abut Radi Standards, including Imprting and Deleting Custm Radi Standards, beginning n page FieldFx User s Guide

141 Hw t select a Radi Standard Press Measure 1 OR Freq/Dist Then Radi Standard Then select a standard using the arrws r rtary knb and press Enter. Attenuatin The Attenuatin setting cntrls the pwer level int the FieldFx. T cmpare Built-in Pwer Meter Mde measurements t SA Channel Pwer measurements, use the same attenuatin settings. Built-in Pwer Meter Mde defaults t 30 db attenuatin, while SA mde defaults t 10 db attentin. In Built-in Pwer Meter, the attenuatin setting is NOT anntated n the screen. Hw t set Attenuatin Press Scale/Amptd Then Mre Then Internal Atten Then chse frm either 30 db r 10 db NOTE The fllwing Built-in Pwer Meter settings are identical t the standard Pwer Meter settings. T learn abut these settings, please refer t the fllwing pages: Set Scale Set Relative and Offset Pwer Set Display Units Set Averaging Single/Cntinuus Set Limits Built-in Pwer Meter Mde - Optin

142 Pwer Meter (USB) Mde Pwer Meter measurements, available with Optin 302, are made with Agilent USB pwer sensrs. Pwer readings are displayed n the FieldFx screen. In this Chapter Supprted Pwer Sensrs Hw t Cnnect the Pwer Sensr Average/Peak Zering Set Frequency Surce Cntrl Set Scale Set Relative and Offset Pwer Set Display Units Set Averaging Single/Cntinuus Step Detectin Mde Set Limits See Als Frequency Offset using Pwer Sensr Supprted Pwer Sensrs NOTE Fr a cmplete list f supprted Agilent USB Pwer Sensrs, please visit: The FieldFx des NOT supprt the fllwing Agilent USB Pwer Sensr features: External Triggering (Time Gated Burst Pwer Measurement), Pwer Sweep Operatin, and Frequency Sweep Operatin. External Zering is NOT allwed n the U2020 X-series Pwer Sensrs. 142 FieldFx User s Guide

143 CAUTION Please refer t yur USB Pwer Sensr User s Guide and bserve the damage levels f yur device. Hw t Cnnect the Pwer Sensr NOTE Cnnect yur Pwer Sensr t ne f the FieldFx USB prts. Use an attenuatr between the DUT and the pwer sensr when measuring pwer levels that are higher than +20 dbm. The attenuatr value can be subtracted frm the measurement using the Offset feature, discussed n page 146. A sequence f status lights are displayed n the base f the pwer sensr. Green blinking light indicates the pwer sensr is cmmunicating r self-tests are being perfrmed. Because the FieldFx is usually cmmunicating with the pwer sensr when it is cnnected, this is the nrmal mde f peratin. Amber light indicates Zering is being perfrmed. Red light indicates an errr has ccurred with the pwer sensr. Refer t pwer sensr dcumentatin. N light indicates the FieldFx is nt cmmunicating with the pwer sensr. This is the case when in Hld mde r when NOT in Pwer Meter Mde. USB Pwer Meter Settings Select Pwer Meter Mde befre making any setting in this sectin. Hw t select Pwer Meter Mde Press Mde_. Then Pwer Meter (USB Sensr). Average / Peak Press Measure 1 Then Meter Display Then chse frm the fllwing: Average Measures and reprts the average f the pwer measurements. Peak Available ONLY n the U202x pwer sensrs. Measures and reprts peak pwer detected at sensr input. Zering The Agilent USB Pwer Sensrs perfrm Internal Zering autmatically. Because Agilent USB Pwer Sensrs have an internal switch, Internal Zering des NOT require that the pwer surce be turned OFF. Fr highest measurement accuracy, when measuring pwer levels belw 30 dbm, External Zering shuld be perfrmed. Pwer Meter (USB) Mde 143

144 NOTE During External Zering, the pwer surce MUST be turned OFF r the pwer sensr discnnected frm the pwer surce (device under test). Pwer is OFF when pwer sensr measurements are belw 60 dbm. When pwer higher than this is detected at the sensr, a warning message is shwn n the FieldFx and External Zering will nt prceed. External Zering is NOT allwed n the U2020 X-series Pwer Sensrs. Hw t perfrm External Zering Press Cal 5. Then External Zer. While either Internal r External Zering is being perfrmed, Zering... is shwn n the FieldFx screen. While this message is present, d NOT make any changes t the FieldFx. In additin, nce External Zering has started, the pwer surce must be OFF fr the entire time that the Zering message is present. Otherwise, the calibratin will be cmprmised but NO warning is shwn. Frequency A table f crrectin factrs versus frequency is stred within Agilent Pwer Sensrs. The frequency f the pwer t be measured is entered in the FieldFx s that the apprpriate crrectin factr can be used. The Surce Cntrl feature (see fllwing sectin) will determine the frequency range f the pwer measurement. Hw t enter Frequency f the Pwer Measurement Press Freq/Dist r Meas Setup 4. Then Frequency. Then type a value using the numeric keypad. The default frequency is 50 MHz. Then press a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. The current frequency is shwn n the FieldFx screen. Surce Cntrl This feature may require an ptin n sme FieldFx mdels. With the FieldFx internal surce enabled, these settings allw yu t make simple, abslute pwer measurements. The surce and the pwer sensr can be physically separated by a lng distance when using a lng USB cable. Set the internal surce frequency by setting the frequency f the pwer measurement. Learn hw in the previus sectin. Pwer Meter measurements are limited by the cmbined frequency ranges f the internal surce when enabled and the frequency range f the pwer sensr. Fr example, assume the frequency range f yur sensr is 9 khz t 18 GHz and the frequency range f the FieldFx is 2 MHz t 6 GHz. With the Surce ON, measurements are limited t 2 MHz t 6 GHz. With the Surce OFF, measurements are allwed frm 9 khz t 18 GHz. 144 FieldFx User s Guide

145 Hw t set Surce Cntrl and Pwer Level Press Freq/Dist Then Advanced NOTE When Optin 208 (FOPS) is enabled, t access Surce Cntrl, press Sweep 3 Then Pwer Setup Learn mre abut FOPS beginning n page 149. Then Surce Enable ON Turn ON the internal surce OFF Turn OFF the internal surce Optinally set the pwer level. Press Src Nm Pwer (-15 dbm default setting) Set utput pwer t an arbitrary value at the displayed CW frequency. Then enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter Scale The scale f the Pwer Meter display can be set manually r autmatically. The majr and minr ticks are set autmatically and can NOT be changed. Althugh the scale settings are limited, yu can view measurements beynd these settings by perfrming Autscale. Hw t Scale the Pwer Meter display Manually: Press Scale / Amptd. Then chse frm the fllwing: Scale Min Sets the lw pwer level f the pwer meter display. Type a number and select the units r press Enter. This value is limited t 100 dbm. Scale Max Sets the high pwer level f the pwer meter display. Type a number and select the units r press Enter. This value is limited t 100 dbm. Autscale: Using Autscale, the current reading is used fr the center f the scale, and Min and Max values are set accrdingly. Press Scale / Amptd. Then Mre. Then Autscale. Pwer Meter (USB) Mde 145

146 Relative and Offset Pwer Measurements Pwer measurements can be made that are relative t anther reading r that are ffset by a fixed value. Use Relative t measure the difference between pwer levels. Use Offset t accunt fr cmpnents r a lng length f cable that is used befre the pwer sensr. Fr example, if using a 10 db attenuatr t prtect the FieldFx, enter an Offset Value f 10 t read the pwer as it wuld appear withut attenuatin. If using a 10 db amplifier, enter an Offset Value f 10 t read the pwer as it wuld appear withut amplificatin. Hw t set Relative and Offset Pwer Measurements Press Scale / Amptd. Then chse frm the fllwing: Relative On Off When switched t ON, the FieldFx measures and stres the current pwer level. Subsequent pwer measurements display a pwer level which is relative t the stred value. When relative is ON, the units change frm dbm t db r frm Watts t %. Offset On Off Tggles ON and OFF the displayed pwer level using the Offset value. Offset Val Value by which the pwer meter display is ffset. A psitive value cmpensates fr a cmpnent with lss. A negative value cmpensates fr a cmpnent with gain. Offset values are limited t +/- 100 db. Display Units Select whether t display pwer in dbm r Watts. When making relative pwer measurements, these change t db and %. Hw t set Pwer Meter display units Press Meas Setup 4 r Scale / Amptd. Then Unit. Then chse frm the fllwing: dbm (db) Sets Pwer Meter display t dbm r db. Watt (%) Sets Pwer Meter display t Watts r %. Reslutin Reslutin sets the number f digits t display after the decimal pint n the digital pwer meter display. Hw t set Reslutin Press Scale / Amptd. Then Mre. Then chse frm 0, 1, 2, r FieldFx User s Guide

147 Averaging Averaging is used t imprve measurement accuracy in lw pwer r nisy pwer situatins. Increased averaging imprves measurement accuracy, but als reduces measurement speed. Hw t set Pwer Meter Averaging Press BW 2 r Meas Setup 4. Then chse frm the fllwing: Averaging Aut Man Off Aut Allws the USB Pwer Sensr t use its Aut Averaging settings. See the USB Pwer Sensr dcumentatin fr details. Man Manually enter an averaging cunt by setting Num Averages. OFF Perfrms NO averaging. Num Averages Sets the number f Pwer Meter readings t be averaged befre a valid reading is displayed. When a number is entered, Averaging is autmatically set t Man. Single r Cntinuus Measure This setting determines whether the FieldFx measures cntinuusly r nly nce each time the Single buttn is pressed. Use Single t cnserve battery pwer r t allw yu t save r analyze a specific measurement. This setting can be changed at any time withut affecting calibratin accuracy. Hw t set Single r Cntinuus Press Sweep 3. Then chse ne f the fllwing: Single Autmatically sets Cntinuus OFF and causes FieldFx t make ONE measurement, then hld fr the next Single key press. When a data trace is displayed, the entire trace is measured, then hlds. The Hld anntatin changes t an arrw --> while the measurement ccurs. Cntinuus Makes cntinuus measurements. This is the typical setting when battery pwer is nt critical. Yu can als use Run / Hld +/- t tggle between Single and Cntinuus. Step Detectin Mde The FieldFx supprts the Step Detectin feature that is present in Agilent USB pwer sensrs. When enabled, this feature reduces settling time after a significant step in the measured pwer. Fr mre infrmatin, please refer t the USB Pwer Meter dcumentatin. Hw t set Step Detectin mde Press Meas Setup 4. Then Step Detectin ON Off Pwer Meter (USB) Mde 147

148 Then chse frm the fllwing: ON Enables step detectin (default setting) OFF Disables step detectin Limits In Pwer Meter Mde, Minimum and Maximum limits set a visible range f acceptable readings between these tw values. Readings that are belw the minimum r abve the maximum are clearly visible n the pwer meter display. Hw t set Limits Press Limit 8. Then chse frm the fllwing: Min Limit On Off Tggles the display f the Minimum limit ON and OFF. Min Limit Value Sets the Minimum limit pwer value. Pwer reading lwer than this will exceed the limit. Max Limit On Off Tggles the display f the Maximum limit ON and OFF. Max Limit Value Sets the Maximum limit pwer value. Pwer reading higher than this will exceed the limit. 148 FieldFx User s Guide

149 Frequency Offset using Pwer Sensr (FOPS) Optin 208 FOPS is accessed thrugh (and requires) Optin 302 USB Pwer Meter Mde. With bth ptins installed, yu can send a signal with the FieldFx internal surce at ne frequency, and measure this signal with an Agilent U-Series USB Pwer Sensr at anther frequency. Display fr FOPS In this Chapter Overview Measurement Selectin Sweep Type and Frequency Pwer Sensr Settling Sweep Settings Amplitude Markers See Als Trace Math Frequency Offset using Pwer Sensr (FOPS) Optin

150 Overview The fllwing shws a typical use case fr FOPS: The DUT is a lng sectin f cable with a mixer and bandpass filter n the IF Output. The FieldFx surce is tuned t f1. The USB pwer sensr, with an equally lng USB/LAN cable, is cnnected t the IF Output. USB/LAN extenders are NOT prvided with the FieldFx r Agilent USB pwer sensrs. Cnversin gain/lss is measured at f2, which is (f1 +/- f Offset). NOTE The dynamic range with FOPS may be significantly different when using varius pwer sensrs. In general, the lwer frequency range sensrs have better dynamic range. FOPS Settings The fllwing settings are unique t FOPS. Standard USB Pwer Meter mde settings, which may be useful with FOPS, are dcumented in that chapter starting n page 142. Select Pwer Meter (USB Sensr) befre making any setting in this sectin. Hw t select Pwer Meter (USB Sensr) Press Mde Then Pwer Meter (USB Sensr) Then cnnect a USB Pwer Sensr t either FieldFx USB prt. Fr a cmplete list f supprted Agilent USB Pwer Sensrs, please visit: FieldFx User s Guide

151 Measurement Selectin Press Measure 1 Then chse frm the fllwing: Src Pwer Measure Similar t a nrmalizatin cal, this selectin guides yu thrugh the fllwing steps t make a measurement at the reference plane and then stre the data trace int memry. 1. Cnnect the pwer sensr t the measurement reference plane. This is the lcatin t where pwer measurements are t be referenced. Fr example, t measure nly the cnversin lss thrugh a cnverter, attach the pwer sensr t the cable that cnnects t the cnverter input. 2. Press Measure. When finished, press Src Data -> Mem t stre the measured data int FieldFx memry. Preset r Mde Preset will clear the stred memry. 3. Optinally chse frm the fllwing: Re-Measure Make anther measurement Src Data View nly the re-measured data. Src Memry View nly the stred memry data. Src Data & Memry View bth the re-measured data and the stred memry data. 4. Press Dne Src Pwr Memry Nt available until surce data is stred int memry. Displays nly the surce pwer memry trace. Gain Nt available until surce data is stred int memry. Displays the Output pwer / Surce pwer (memry trace). Rx Pwer Displays the raw utput pwer at the USB pwer sensr. Sweep Type and Frequency NOTE Set the surce and receiver frequencies fr the FOPS measurements. The receiver is an Agilent U-Series Pwer Sensr. These are bradband measurement devices, which means that they measure pwer ver a very wide frequency range. Tables f frequency and pwer crrectin factrs are stred within the pwer sensrs. The receiver (Rx) frequencies are used ONLY t apply the apprpriate crrectin factrs t the pwer levels measured with the pwer sensr. It is YOUR respnsibility t ensure that ONLY the signal f interest is present at the pwer sensr. All ther signals MUST be filtered apprpriately. Hw t set Sweep Type and Frequency Press Freq/Dist Then Frequency Then Sweep Type Then chse frm the fllwing: CW Used t make standard (nn-ffset) pwer meter measurements at a single frequency. Learn mre beginning n page 142. Frequency Offset using Pwer Sensr (FOPS) Optin

152 NOTE T make swept FOPS measurements at a single frequency, chse Swept, then enter a Src Center frequency, then Span = 0 Hz. Swept Used t make swept FOPS measurements. Then enter surce (Src) frequencies as either Center and Span r Start and Stp. Bth methds set the FieldFx internal surce sweep range ut the Prt 1 RF Output cnnectr. The frequency limits are determined by the limits f bth the FieldFx and the pwer sensr. The LOW frequency is limited by the higher f either the FieldFx r the pwer sensr minimum frequencies. The HIGH frequency is limited by the lwer f either the FieldFx r the pwer sensr maximum frequencies. Then Mre. Then Freq Display. This determines hw the receiver frequencies belw the graticules are displayed. Chse frm the fllwing: Start Anntated as Start and Stp frequencies. Center Anntated as Center and Span frequencies. Then chse frm the fllwing tw methds t determine the ffset frequency (the frequency that the receiver is ffset frm the surce). This is typically the frequency f the LO that is used with the frequency cnverter. The frequency ffset may be psitive, negative, r zer. Freq Offset Enter an Offset frequency. The receiver frequencies are calculated. Offset Calculatr Enter the Receiver Start and Stp frequencies. Then press Calculate Offset. Press Rx Swp t select the receiver sweep directin. Fwd Used fr systems fr which the utput frequency is Offs + Src. The utput frequency f the DUT and the receiver sweeps in the same directin as the surce. Rev Used fr systems fr which the utput frequency is Offs - Src. The utput frequency f the DUT and the receiver sweeps in reverse directin as cmpared t the surce. Invalid Settings Vilatins f the fllwing cnditins will return an errr message: The frequency span fr the surce and receiver must be the same. Bth the surce and receiver frequencies must be psitive. FOPS Cnfiguratin Examples Negative Offset, RxSwp = Fwd (Offs + Src) Src = 2 GHz t 3 GHz Offset = -1 GHz Rx = 1 GHz t 2 GHz 152 FieldFx User s Guide

153 Psitive Offset, RxSwp = Rev (Offs - Src) Src = 2 GHz t 3 GHz Offset = 3.8 GHz Rx = GHz t 800 MHz Psitive Offset, RxSwp = Fwd (Offs + Src) Src = 2 GHz t 3 GHz Offset = 3.8 GHz Rx = 5.8 GHz t 6.8 GHz Pwer Sensr Settling The fllwing tw settings wrk tgether t allw yu t chse the right cmprmise between measurement speed and accuracy. Each pwer sensr reading is cnsidered "settled" when either: The difference between tw cnsecutive readings are within the Tlerance value r when: The Max (number f) Readings has been made. The readings that were taken are averaged tgether t becme the displayed reading. Hw t chse Pwer Sensr settling Press BW 2 Then Tlerance. Enter a value in db between 0 and 10 using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Tlerance f 0 will never be achieve, s the Max Readings will always be made. Press Enter Then Max Readings. Enter a value between 1 and 20 using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter Sweep Settings These settings prvide added cntrl f the FOPS measurement. Hw t make additinal sweep settings Press Sweep 3 Then chse frm the fllwing: Pwer Setup Surce Enable ON Turn ON the internal surce (required fr FOPS). OFF Turn OFF the internal surce Src Nm Pwer (-15 dbm default setting) Set utput pwer t an arbitrary value at the surce CW frequency. Then enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter Frequency Offset using Pwer Sensr (FOPS) Optin

154 Num Pints r Freq Step Size Bth settings cntrl the number f pwer sensr measurements between the Start and Stp frequencies. Enter ne setting and the ther will be changed autmatically. There must be at least tw data pints. Dwell /Pint Specifies a settling time (in secnds) after the internal surce steps t the next frequency and befre the pwer sensr makes a measurement. Amplitude Markers Amplitude markers are hrizntal dtted lines that yu can mve t any amplitude level n the screen. The tw amplitude markers can be set independently r used as a pair f delta markers. Amplitude markers can be used as a visual cmparisn aid with the data trace. Hw t make Amplitude Marker settings Press Marker Then Mre Then Ampl Markers Then chse frm the fllwing: OFF Amplitude markers are NOT displayed. ON Amplitude markers ARE displayed at their previus psitins. Then Ampl Mkr 1 r 2 Enter a value in dbm fr the marker using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Delta AmplMkr Then chse frm the fllwing: ON AmplMkr 2 value is relative t AmplMkr 1. When AmplMkr 1 is mved, AmplMkr 2 als mves t maintain the AmplMkr 2 value between them. OFF The tw amplitude markers mve independent f ne anther. Trace Math NOTE Trace Math allws yu t cmpare data traces and perfrm simple math. Learn hw t use Trace Math beginning n page 187. All Data and Memry features wrk as dcumented EXCEPT fr the fllwing: When Trace, then Data -> Mem is pressed, if a Src Pwer trace is active, then RxPwer is actually stred int memry. T Cmpare Src Pwer (Input) and Rx Pwer (Output): 1. Meas Rx Pwer 2. Stre t memry 3. View Data & Memry 4. Meas Src Pwer. 154 FieldFx User s Guide

155 Pulse Measurements Mde - Optin 330 Pulsed pwer meter measurements, available with Optin 330, are made with Agilent U2020 X-Series USB Peak Pwer Sensrs. These sensrs are capable f detecting, measuring, and string data frm a train f pulses at the RF input. This data is queried frm the USB Pwer Sensr and displayed n the FieldFx screen. Yu can then analyze the data using several selectable settings. NOTE In this Chapter Supprted Pwer Sensrs Measurement Selectin Frequency / Time Zm Windw Scale Averaging Vide Bandwidth Single r Cntinuus Measure Reslutin Triggering Pulse Timing Diagram Marker Settings Amplitude Markers Marker Search Aut Analysis Pulse Tp Grid Trace Memry Many f the features included with the FieldFx Pulse Measurements Mde are discussed in detail in these tw dcuments: Agilent U2020 X-Series USB Peak Pwer Sensrs Prgrammer s Guide. Pulse Measurements Mde - Optin

156 Best Practices Fr Making The Mst Accurate Radar Pulse Measurements Supprted Pwer Sensrs Pulse measurements are made using any f the Agilent U2020 X-Series USB Peak Pwer Sensrs. Zering f the U2020 X-Series USB Peak Pwer Sensrs is perfrmed autmatically at pwer up, every 5 secnds, and prir t measuring lw level signals. Switching between Pulse Measurement Mde and Pwer Meter Mde NOT Supprted - Using a single USB Peak Pwer Sensr and switching between Pwer Meter Mde and Pulse Measurement Mde. Bth mdes will attempt t prgram the sensr, which culd cause ne r bth mdes t hang, r at least reprt inaccurate data. Supprted - Using ne U2000A Average Pwer Sensr cnnected t the tp USB prt fr Pwer Meter Mde, and ne Peak Pwer Sensr cnnected t the bttm USB prt fr Pulse Measurement Mde. NOTE Hw t Cnnect the Pwer Sensr Cnnect yur Pwer Sensr t ne f the FieldFx USB prts. Use an attenuatr between the DUT and the pwer sensr when measuring pwer levels that are higher than +20 dbm. The attenuatr value can be subtracted frm the measurement using the Offset feature, discussed n page 146. A sequence f status lights are displayed n the base f the pwer sensr. Green blinking light indicates the pwer sensr is cmmunicating r self-tests are being perfrmed. Because the FieldFx is usually cmmunicating with the pwer sensr when it is cnnected, this is the nrmal mde f peratin. Amber light indicates Zering is being perfrmed. Red light indicates an errr has ccurred with the pwer sensr. Refer t pwer sensr dcumentatin. N light indicates the FieldFx is nt cmmunicating with the pwer sensr. This is the case when in Hld mde r when NOT in Pulsed Measurement Mde. Pulse Measurement Settings Select Pulse Measurement Mde befre making any setting in this sectin. Hw t select Pulse Measurement Mde Press Mde_ Then Mre if yur FieldFx cntains mre than five measurement mdes. Then Pulse Measurement 156 FieldFx User s Guide

157 Measurement Selectin The pulse measurement results are presented as either a traditinal pwer meter display r as a trace graph. Hw t select the Measurement Press Measure 1 Then chse frm the fllwing: Average Average pwer (Meter display) Peak Peak pwer (Meter display) Pk t Avg Displays the difference between the abve tw measurements (Meter display) Trace Graph (default) The primary trace (Tr 1) plts pulse data in amplitude versus time. Optinally, yu can enable a secndary zm trace. Learn hw n page 158. When a Meter display measurement is selected, the fllwing Pulse Measurement Mde settings are identical t the standard USB Pwer Meter Mde settings. Learn hw t set Scale n page 144. Learn hw t set Relative and Offset Pwer n page 146. Learn hw t set Display Units n page 146. Learn hw t set Limits n page 147. Frequency / Time Hw t set Frequency Press Freq/Dist Then chse frm the fllwing: Frequency Sets the center frequency f the carrier n which pulse mdulatin resides. This is used t set amplitude crrectin f the USB Pwer Sensr. Hw t set Time Specify the time ver which data will be acquired by the USB Pwer Sensr. When Trace Graph is selected, Tr 1 is anntated with these values. Time can be specified using either f the fllwing pairs f values: Center 1 and Time/div 1 Specify the center time and time per divisin. Start Time and Time Length Specify the start time and length f acquisitin. A psitive start time indicates a delay after the sensr detects a pulse signal. A negative start time displays data that is acquired BEFORE the sensr detects a pulse signal (r T-zer). Fllw each by entering a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Pulse Measurements Mde - Optin

158 After using the keypad, select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Zm Windw When Trace Graph is selected as the measurement, a secndary Zm Trace can be used t view a zmed prtin f Tr 1. When Zm Windw is ON, blue vertical psts appear n Tr 1 t indicate the current start, center, and stp times f the zm windw. The zm windw can be scaled using the standard Scale settings. Hw t make Zm Windw settings Press Trace 6 Then Zm Windw Then chse frm the fllwing: ON Opens the zm windw n the bttm half f the FieldFx screen. The windw includes the zmed trace. OFF Clses the zm windw. Zm Center While mnitring the T within the blue vertical psts n Tr 1, enter a value fr the center time using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Zm Time/div While mnitring the blue vertical psts n the primary trace, enter a value fr the zm windw span using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Trace 1 Press t select Tr 1. This can als be dne by using the arrws. Select a trace befre making trace settings, such as Scale. Zm Trace Press t select the zm trace. Scale Fr Meter-style measurements, learn hw t set Scale, Relative and Offset Pwer, display Units, and Reslutin beginning n page 144. Hw t set Scale fr Trace Graph measurements Select a trace t scale using the arrws. Press Scale / Amptd Then chse frm the fllwing methds: Autscale Autmatically adjusts the Y-axis t cmfrtably fit the Min and Max amplitude f the trace n the screen. Set Scale, Reference Level, and Reference Psitin: Scale Manually enter a scale per divisin t view specific areas f the trace. Ref Level Manually set the value f the reference line. Enter a negative value by pressing Run/Hld (+/-) either befre r after typing a value. Ref Psitin Manually set the psitin f the reference line. Values must be between 0 (TOP line) and 10 (BOTTOM line). 158 FieldFx User s Guide

159 Offset ON Enable Offset. When nly trace 1 is visible, Offset ON appears t the left f the trace. Offset Val Enter a value by which all amplitude values will be ffset. This can have the effect f virtually remving a cmpnent frm the measurement path. A psitive value cmpensates fr a cmpnent with lss. A negative value cmpensates fr a cmpnent with gain. Offset values are limited t +/- 100 db. Averaging Averaging helps t reduce the effects f randm nise n a measurement. The mre measurements that are averaged, the greater the amunt f nise reductin. Averaging is allwed fr all pulse measurements. Averaging is perfrmed in the USB Pwer Sensr befre the data is sent t the FieldFx. Anntatin in the left pane shws the state f the Average setting. When Manual is selected, the Num f Averages is setting is als shwn. Hw t set Averaging Press BW 2. Then Averaging Then chse frm the fllwing: Aut Averaging is set t a reasnable value by the USB Pwer Sensr. Man Averaging is set t the value specified in the Num Averages setting. Off Averaging is OFF Num Averages Select a value using the numeric keypad, then press Enter. Vide Bandwidth The Vide Bandwidth setting enables an FIR (finite impulse respnse) filter within the USB Pwer Sensr. The filter setting affects the appearance f the trace results. Vide Bandwidth is allwed fr all pulse measurements Hw t set Vide Bandwidth Press BW 2. Then Vide Bandwidth Then chse frm the fllwing: Off Vide Bandwidth is disabled. Lw Similar t a lw pass filter, ripple in the pass band is minimized but allws higher side-lbes n the filter skirt. Medium Smth pass band with reasnable transitin ripple. High The pass band ripple is similar t the OFF setting, but the transitin skirts are smther. Pulse Measurements Mde - Optin

160 Single r Cntinuus Measure This setting determines whether the FieldFx cntinuusly queries the USB Pwer Sensr fr data, r nly nce each time the Single buttn is pressed. Use Single t cnserve battery pwer r t allw yu t save r analyze specific data. Hw t set Single r Cntinuus Press Sweep 3 Then chse ne f the fllwing: Single Autmatically sets Cntinuus OFF and causes the FieldFx t query the USB Pwer Sensr ONCE, then hld fr the next Single key press. Hld is anntated in the upper left crner f the display. Cntinuus Queries the USB Pwer Sensr whenever a valid trigger signal is present. This is the typical setting when battery pwer is nt critical. Yu can als use Run / Hld +/- t tggle between Single and Cntinuus. Reslutin Reslutin is the number f individual acquisitins that ccur in the USB Pwer Sensr. This data is read by the FieldFx and pltted acrss the X-axis t frm a trace. Mre data pints increases measurement reslutin. Hwever, mre data pints requires mre time t acquire, query, and plt. Hw t set Reslutin Press Sweep 3 Then Reslutin Then chse frm the fllwing: Lw 240 data pints. Medium 1000 data pints. High Calculated value - apprximately 8000 data pints. Triggering Fr pulse measurements, a trigger signal refers t the event that causes the USB Peak Pwer Sensr t initiate measurement acquisitin. It des NOT refer t triggering the FieldFx. Trigger settings can be used with ALL pulse measurements unless stated therwise. A Waiting fr Trigger message n the FieldFx screen is psted n behalf f the USB Pwer Sensr when it is waiting fr a pulse signal at the RF Input (Internal) r a TTL signal at the USB Sensr External Trigger input. Hw t make Trigger settings Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Then Trig Type 160 FieldFx User s Guide

161 Then chse frm the fllwing: Freerun The USB Pwer Sensr acquires data withut waiting fr a trigger. This mde is NOT supprted fr Trace Graph measurements. Internal The USB Pwer Sensr acquires data when a valid pulse signal is detected at the RF input. The fllwing Trigger settings determine the validity f the trigger signal. External The USB Pwer Sensr acquires data when a valid TTL signal is detected at the USB Pwer Sensr external trigger input. Trigger Edge This setting determines which edge f a trigger signal initiates data acquisitin. Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Then Trig Edge Then chse frm the fllwing: Ps Acquisitin is triggered by the rising (psitive) edge f a valid signal. Neg Acquisitin is triggered by the falling (negative) edge f a valid signal. Trigger Delay After a valid trigger signal is received at the USB Pwer Sensr, data acquisitin begins after the specified Trigger Delay time PLUS the specified Start time. See the Pulse Timing diagram n page 162 fr mre infrmatin. Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Then Trig Delay Then enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Aut Trigger Used ONLY when Trigger Type = Internal, this setting determines whether the trigger level is set manually r is set t the default level in the USB Pwer Sensr firmware. Press Sweep 3 Then Trigger Then AutTrig Then chse frm the fllwing: ON Trigger level is determined by the USB Pwer Sensr firmware. OFF The trigger level is set manually using the Trigger Level setting. Trigger Level Used when Trigger Type = Internal AND Aut Trigger = OFF (Manual). Press Sweep 3 Pulse Measurements Mde - Optin

162 Then Trigger Then Trig Level Then set the trigger level using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. A line appears n Tr 1 at the current trigger level setting. Data acquisitin ccurs when the RF input signal crsses the line. This setting can be used with either Psitive r Negative edge triggering. Trigger Settings Anntatin Trigger settings are anntated n the FieldFx screen as highlighted in red in the fllwing image: Trig Level = -10 dbm, Trig Type (Int), Ps Slpe (/), Delay Pulse Timing Diagram Marker Settings Markers are nt allwed with Meter-style measurements. Markers are displayed n Tr 1 and als n the zm trace if the marker is within the zm windw time span. Up t six standard markers can be used t prvide readuts f the Y-axis amplitude at the current X-axis lcatin. The six standard markers can als be used as Delta Markers. Learn mre abut standard markers n page FieldFx User s Guide

163 Amplitude Markers Amplitude markers are hrizntal dtted lines that yu can mve t any amplitude level n the screen. The tw amplitude markers can be set independently r used as a pair f delta markers. Amplitude markers can be used as a visual cmparisn aid with the pulse measurement traces. Hw t make Amplitude Marker settings Press Marker Then Mre Then Ampl Markers Then chse frm the fllwing: OFF Amplitude markers are NOT displayed. ON Amplitude markers ARE displayed at their previus psitins. Then Ampl Mkr 1 r 2 Enter a value in dbm fr the marker using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Delta AmplMkr Then chse frm the fllwing: ON AmplMkr 2 value is relative t AmplMkr 1. When AmplMkr 1 is mved, AmplMkr 2 als mves t maintain the AmplMkr 2 value between them. OFF The tw amplitude markers mve independent f ne anther. Marker Search Use Marker Search t find and mve markers t lcatins n the Tr 1 trace. Hw t Search with Markers Activate the marker t be used fr the search Then press Mrk ->/Tls. Then Marker Search Then Zne Search Then chse frm the fllwing: ON Available ONLY when the zm windw is enabled, the search is limited t the zne defined by the zm windw. OFF The search is perfrmed ver the entire Tr 1 trace. Then chse frm the fllwing: Target, Peak, and Minimum. Learn mre abut these standard features beginning n page 179. Rise Time Select, then set a value in db. Delta markers are created and placed at the Peak and at the specified value BEFORE the Peak. Pulse Measurements Mde - Optin

164 NOTE Fall Time Select, then set a value in db. Delta markers are created and placed at the Peak and at the specified value AFTER the Peak. Rise and Fall time in Marker Search uses different criteria than in Aut Analysis and will therefre result in different reprted values. Aut Analysis Aut Analysis reprts the fllwing TEN pulse measurements: 1 - Average Pwer Average pwer level f all measured data pints 2 - Peak Pwer Highest reading f all measured data pints 3 - Peak minus Average Difference between the abve tw results 4 - Pulse Tp Pwer value based n the specified Pulse Tp setting. 5 - Rise Time The time it takes fr a pulse t rise frm 10% t 90% f its peak value. 6 - Fall Time The time it takes fr a pulse t fall frm 90% t 10% f its peak value. 7 - Pulse Width The time between the rising edge and falling edge f a pulse. 8 - Pulse Perid The time f ne cmplete pulse cycle 9 - Duty Cycle The rati f the pulse width / pulse perid Pulse Rep Freq The rate, in pulses / sec, at which pulses recur. Hw t enable Aut Analysis Press Mrk ->/Tls. Then Aut Analysis Then chse frm the fllwing: OFF Analysis OFF ON The Analysis values appear belw trace 1. Pulse Tp Pulse Tp is NOT the same as the pulse Peak. Pulse Tp is used t set and reprt the reference pwer level. Yu enter a value in percent, and the Pulse Tp value is reprted in the Aut Analysis table in db dwn frm 100% f the reference pwer level. Hw t set Pulse Tp Press Mrk ->/Tls Then Pulse Tp Then enter a percent value between 0 and 100 using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. When set t 10%, 10 db dwn frm the 100% reference level is reprted. When set t 50%, 3 db dwn frm the 100% reference level is reprted. 164 FieldFx User s Guide

165 When set t 90%, 0.5 db dwn frm the 100% reference level is reprted. Grid Enables and disables the display f a 10 x 10 grid n the FieldFx screen. Hw t enable Grid display Press Mrk ->/Tls Then Grid OFF Grid OFF ON A grid f X/Y lines appears n the screen. Trace Memry A memry trace is a pulse measurement Tr 1 data trace (NOT the trace in the Zm windw) that has been stred in the FieldFx vlatile memry. It then becmes static, meaning it is nt updated with nrmal pulse measurements. It can be displayed n the screen by itself, r with a pulse trace fr cmparisn purpses. The Tr 1 data trace is displayed in yellw. The memry trace is displayed in blue. Hw t display data and memry traces Press Trace 6. Then Trace Memry Then Data->Mem t stre the current live trace int memry. A beep sunds t cnfirm the data trace has been saved t memry. There is n display anntatin that indicates that the memry trace has been stred. Press Data t view nly the data trace. Press Memry t view nly the memry trace. Press Data & Memry t view bth the live trace and the stred memry trace. Pulse Measurements Mde - Optin

166 VVM (Vectr Vltmeter) Mde - Optin 308 VVM Mde (Optin 308) measures the electrical length f cables and ther devices. The 1-Prt Cable Trimming and 2-Prt Transmissin measurement displays the electrical length in bth Magnitude and Phase. Display fr the 1-Prt Cable Trimming measurement In this Chapter Overview Measurement Selectin Frequency Selectin Display Reslutin IF Bandwidth Output Pwer Averaging Single/Cntinuus VVM Calibratin Zering Prcedures 1-Prt Cable Trimming Measurement Prt Transmissin Measurement A/B and B/A Measurements FieldFx User s Guide

167 Overview In the FieldFx, bth 1-prt and 2-prt measurement types use a different cnfiguratin setup frm the HP/Agilent 8508A Vectr Vltmeter. Typical 8508A measurement cnfiguratin as shwn in the 8508A manual. The abve blck diagram requires an external surce and directinal cupler t measure the electrical length f a DUT r cable t be trimmed. Separate paths are used t measure the Incident signal (A) and Reflected signal (B). T measure the rati f the Reflected/Incident signals, yu were required t select B/A fr bth the Magnitude and Phase display. In the FieldFx, the surce and directinal cupler are inside the instrument. This allws yu t cnnect the DUT t ONLY the FieldFx PORT 1, with NO external instruments, in rder t make Cable Trimming measurements. See the FieldFx blck diagram and Cable Trimming prcedures beginning n page 171. VVM Mde Settings Select VVM Mde befre making any setting in this sectin. Hw t select VVM Mde Press Mde Then VVM Measurement Selectin Hw t select a VVM Measurement Press Measure 1 Then chse frm the fllwing: 1-Prt Cable Trimming 1-prt reflectin measurement. Learn hw t make this measurement n page 171. VVM (Vectr Vltmeter) Mde - Optin

168 2-Prt Transmissin 2-prt transmissin measurement. Learn hw t make this measurement n page 172. B/A and A/B 2-prt ratied receiver measurements using external surces. Learn mre n page 173. Frequency Selectin VVM measurements are made at a single CW frequency. NOTE Hw t set Frequency Frequency can be set t 1 Hz reslutin. Press Freq/Dist Then Frequency Enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. After using the arrws r the rtary knb, press Enter. The increment setting f the arrws is based n the current span and can NOT be changed in VVM Mde. After using the keypad, select a multiplier key. Learn abut multiplier abbreviatins n page 19. Display Reslutin Yu can display either ne digit r tw digits after the decimal pint fr bth magnitude and phase readings. This setting survives a Preset and Mde Preset. Hw t set Reslutin Press Scale/Amptd Then Reslutin Then chse: (default) IF Bandwidth Reducing the IF receiver bandwidth reduces the effect f randm nise n a measurement. Hwever, narrwer IF bandwidths cause lnger measurement times. Fr highest accuracy, Zer AFTER changing the IF Bandwidth. Learn abut Zering n page 170. Hw t set IF BW Press BW 2 Then IF BW Then chse frm the fllwing: 168 FieldFx User s Guide

169 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 khz 10 khz 100 khz Mre 30 Hz 300 Hz 3 khz 30 khz Output Pwer Cautin Set the pwer level ut f the FieldFx t High, Lw, r manually set pwer level t a value between High and Lw. Generally, the high pwer setting is used when measuring passive, high-lss devices t place the signal farther frm the nise flr. Hwever, fr devices that are sensitive t high pwer levels such as amplifiers, use the Lw pwer setting. Fr best measurement accuracy, use the Manual pwer setting at -15 dbm. After calibratin, the pwer level can be decreased fr amplifiers, r increased fr higher dynamic range. Pwer Level settings in this mde will NOT change Pwer Level settings in ther mdes. T help prevent damage t yur DUT, use cautin when changing mdes with yur DUT cnnected t the FieldFx test prts. Hw t set Output Pwer Press Meas Setup 4. Then Mre Then Output Pwer High (Default setting) Sets utput pwer t the maximum achievable pwer at all displayed frequency. Lw Sets utput pwer t apprximately 45 dbm. Man Set utput pwer t an arbitrary value. Then press Pwer Level Then enter a value using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter. Averaging Averaging helps t reduce the effects f randm nise n a measurement. The FieldFx cmputes the displayed value ver several cnsecutive readings. Average cunt determines the number f readings t average. The higher the average cunt, the greater the amunt f nise reductin. An average cunter is shwn in the left edge f the screen as Avg N. This shws the number f previus readings that have been averaged tgether. When the cunter reaches the specified cunt, then a running average f the last N readings is displayed. Average cunt = 1 means there is NO averaging. This setting can be changed at any time withut affecting calibratin accuracy. Hw t set Averaging Press Meas Setup 4 Then Mre VVM (Vectr Vltmeter) Mde - Optin

170 Then Avg N where N is the current cunt setting. Enter a value using the numeric keypad. Enter 1 fr NO averaging. Press Enter. T restart the averaging prcess, press Meas Setup 4, then Mre, then Restart Single r Cntinuus Measure This setting determines whether the FieldFx measures cntinuusly r nly nce each time the Single buttn is pressed. Use Single t cnserve battery pwer r t allw yu t save r analyze a specific measurement. This setting can be changed at any time withut affecting calibratin accuracy. Hw t set Single r Cntinuus Press Meas Setup 4 Then chse ne f the fllwing: Single Autmatically sets Cntinuus OFF and causes the FieldFx t make ONE measurement, then hld fr the next Single key press. When a data trace is displayed, the entire trace is measured, then hlds. The Hld anntatin changes t an arrw --> while the measurement ccurs. Cntinuus OFF and Hld bth put the FieldFx in Hld mde. Cntinuus ON Makes cntinuus measurements. This is the typical setting when battery pwer is nt critical. Yu can als use Run / Hld +/- t tggle between Single and Cntinuus. VVM Calibratin CalReady is accurate fr mst zered VVM measurements at frequencies belw abut 6 GHz. Fr the very highest accuracy, especially abve 6 GHz, then perfrm a QuickCal r Mechanical Cal. Learn mre n page 64. Press Zer OFF befre calibrating. Zering Zering, als knwn as Nrmalizatin, r Data/Memry, simply Zeres the Magnitude and Phase display when Zer is pressed. All subsequent measurements are relative t the measurement that was made when Zer was pressed. When an instrument state is saved with Zer ON, the zering data is saved with the state file, similar t hw a calibratin is saved with a state file. When perfrming a 1-Prt Cable Trimming peratin, a reference cable is cnnected and measured. Then Zer is pressed, and subsequent cables are measured and trimmed t match electrical length f the reference cable. Fr 2-prt measurements, Zer is typically pressed when a THRU cnnectin is made in place f a DUT. Learn mre n page 172. Press Zer OFF befre perfrming a QuickCal r Mechanical Cal. 170 FieldFx User s Guide

171 Hw t select Zering Press Meas Setup 4 Then Zer Press Zer OFF t turn zering ff. 1-Prt Cable Trimming Measurements A 1-Prt Cable Trimming measurement is used in a cable fabricatin prcedure t validate prper electrical length. The R receiver measures incident signal (green line) ut f the surce. The A receiver measures reflected signal (red line) frm the end f the DUT (black line). In VVM mde, the display ALWAYS shws ratied (A/R) measurements which is the electrical length f the DUT. FieldFx Blck Diagram NOTE Hw t make a 1-Prt Cable Trimming Measurement 1. Press Mde then VVM then 1-Prt Cable Trimming. 2. Press Freq/Dist then enter the frequency fr the measurement. 3. T imprve measurement stability, change the IF Bandwidth, Output Pwer, and Averaging settings as needed. 4. Press Meas Setup 4 then Zer OFF. 5. Optinally calibrate the FieldFx. Learn mre abut VVM calibratin n page T ensure that the calibratin is adequate, perfrm the fllwing ptinal Measurement Verificatin prcedure. This measurement verificatin prcedure is suitable fr lw frequency measurements. Hwever, fr high frequency measurements, a mre sphisticated prcedure is required. a. Cnnect a shrt standard t PORT 1 where cables t be trimmed will be cnnected. b. Press Meas Setup 4 and press Zer. c. Remve the shrt standard and cnnect the pen standard. d. Cnfirm that magnitude measurement is less than 0.1 db and that the phase value reads 180 degrees. 7. Attach the shrtest cable t the FieldFx PORT 1 cnnectr. This cable is the reference cable. Leave the end f the reference cable pen (unterminated). 8. Press Meas Setup 4 then press Zer. 9. Remve the reference cable frm the FieldFx PORT 1 cnnectr. VVM (Vectr Vltmeter) Mde - Optin

172 NOTE 10. Cnnect an unterminated, lnger cable t the FieldFx PORT 1 cnnectr. 11. Observe the displayed phase difference between the reference cable and the untrimmed cable. The VVM phase reading shws a maximum f ±180. Therefre, the electrical length f the untrimmed cable MUST be within 180 f the reference cable. 12. Carefully trim the cable until the phase shift reads zer. The attached cable s electrical length is nw matched t the reference cable. 13. Repeat steps 10 thrugh 12 fr the remaining cables t be trimmed. 2-Prt Transmissin Measurements A 2-Prt Transmissin measurement is used fr measuring electrical length, insertin lss, gain, r islatin f a DUT at a single CW frequency. The FieldFx signal surce is transmitted ut the prt 1 cnnectr, thrugh the DUT, and int the prt 2 cnnectr. In the fllwing image, the gain f an amplifier is being measured. 2-Prt Transmissin measurement f an amplifier Hw t make a 2-Prt Transmissin Measurement 1. Press Mde then VVM then 2-Prt Transmissin. 2. Press Freq/Dist and enter the measurement frequency. 3. Press Meas Setup 4 then Mre then Output Pwer. Select High fr passive devices. Select Lw fr amplifiers. 4. Calibrate the FieldFx using ne f the methds described n page 170. Befre perfrming a QuickCal r Mechanical Cal, press Meas Setup 4 then Zer OFF. 5. Cnnect the DUT. Ntes: The magnitude value is the gain (psitive value) r the lss (negative value) f the DUT. The phase value is the difference in phase (in degrees) between the DUT input and utput. T measure islatin f the amplifier, reverse the cnnectin t the amplifier (PORT 1 t the amplifier utput). 172 FieldFx User s Guide

173 A/B and B/A Measurements NOTE These measurements allw yu t use the FieldFx A and B receivers, alng with an external surce, t make ratied measurements. These measurements require the Full 2-prt S-parameters ptin. The image belw shws a typical cnfiguratin fr a B/A magnitude and phase measurement f a 2-prt DUT. This DUT can be an antenna / prbe setup. Using netwrk analyzer terms, the image shws the A receiver as the reference receiver which measures the signal that is applied t the DUT. The B receiver is the test prt receiver which measures the DUT respnse. B/A Transmissin measurement with external surce Prcedure 1. Cnnect the external surce s frequency reference utput t the FieldFx Freq Ref IN n the tp panel. If yu are unable t use a cmmn frequency reference, then increase the IFBW t ensure yu are measuring the peak f the crrect signal. After lcating and tuning t the signal, yu may be able t lwer the IFBW t reduce nise. 2. On the FieldFx, select System, then System Cnfiguratin, then Frequency Ref, then Ext. 3. Press Mde, then VVM, then B/A r A/B 4. The FieldFx internal surce is NOT used, s the utput pwer setting is nt relevant. 5. T calibrate, replace the DUT with a THRU cnnectin, preferably by cnnecting tgether the tw Pwer Splitters (shwn in green). Fr lw frequency measurements, TEEs can be used. 6. Press Meas Setup 4, then Zer. 7. Cnnect the DUT and measure. VVM (Vectr Vltmeter) Mde - Optin

174 Data Analysis Features The fllwing features can be used after a measurement t analyze the results. In this Chapter All abut Markers Abut Delta Markers Marker Table Cupled Markers Marker Clrs Marker Trace (CAT and NA Mde) Marker Trace (SA Mde) Marker Frmat Searching with Markers What Is a Peak Marker Functins SA Nise Marker SA Band Pwer Marker SA Frequency Cunter at Marker All abut Limit Lines Relative Limit Lines Build Frm Trace Limit Optins Hw t Save and Recall Limits All abut Trace Math Abut Math Operatins All abut Markers Markers mve alng the X-axis range f the measurement trace t prvide a numerical readut f each measured data pint. Markers als allw yu t search fr specific Y-axis values. A trace can cntain up t six markers. The marker readut n the FieldFx screen displays X and Y-axis infrmatin fr the current active marker ONLY. A Marker Table can be displayed that allws yu t simultaneusly view X and Y- axis infrmatin fr all markers. Markers can be used in CAT, NA, SA, and Pulse Measurements Mdes. Hw t create Markers Press Marker. Then Markers t select a marker t activate. Then Nrmal t activate that marker. A marker is created n the trace in the middle f the X-axis. That marker is nw active. 174 FieldFx User s Guide

175 Then mve the marker using the rtary knb, the arrws, r by entering an X-axis psitin with the number keys. Then press Enter. Hw t mve a Marker after it is created Press Marker. Then Markers repeatedly until the marker f interest is selected. The OFF, Nrmal, r Delta sftkey is black t indicate the current setting f each marker. Then mve the marker as when it was first created. Markers can als be mved using ne f the marker search functins. Learn mre n page 179. Marker 2 is Active, marker 1 is NOT active. Abut Delta Markers A Delta marker prvides X-and Y-axis readut infrmatin that is relative t a reference marker. A Delta marker is created with a (delta symbl) t distinguish it frm the reference marker. All six markers can be a Delta marker pair. Peak search functins can be perfrmed using delta markers. Data Analysis Features 175

176 A Delta marker and its assciated reference marker. The marker readut shws the difference between the tw markers in frequency and amplitude. Hw t Create a Delta Marker Create a Nrmal marker and mve it t the reference psitin. Press Delta. The marker becmes the reference marker and fixed in its X-Axis psitin. Mve the Delta marker using the numeric keypad, the arrws, r the rtary knb. Press Enter when finished. Hw t mve the Reference marker Press Delta t turn the Delta marker OFF. Mve the marker t the new psitin. Then press Delta again, t turn the Delta marker back ON. Fix the psitin f the Reference marker (SA Mde ONLY) In SA mde, the reference marker can be fixed at the Y-axis psitin f the data trace when the marker was created, r it can flat with each sweep at the Y-axis psitin f the data trace. In CAT and NA mde, the reference marker always flats with the data trace. This setting applies t all SA markers. Create a Delta marker. Frm the Mrk ->/Tls menu, press Mre, then Marker Prperties, then Delta Ref Fixed OFF The reference marker flats at the data trace Y-axis psitin. ON The reference marker is fixed at the Y-axis psitin f the data trace when the marker was created (default SA mde). 176 FieldFx User s Guide

177 Marker Table The Marker Table can be displayed at the bttm f the FieldFx screen. It can display infrmatin fr up t 6 markers in a full-width windw, and up t 3 markers fr a half-width windw (NA mde). The marker table squeezes the graticule area when activated. Hw t display the Marker table Press Marker. Then Marker Table On Off. Cupled Markers Cupled Markers, available in NA mde nly, allws yu t simultaneusly create and mve markers that have the same number fr all traces. Fr example, when marker 2 is created n a trace, a marker 2 is created fr ALL traces. When any marker 2 is mved, they all mve tgether t the same X-axis psitin. Cupled markers are allwed nly in NA mde and are relevant nly in multitrace cnfiguratins. Yu can have markers that are cupled and thers that are uncupled. Peak functins mve the marker t the peak n the active trace, while all ther markers mve t the same X-axis psitin. Cupled Markers mve n ALL traces at the same time. NOTE Hw t create Uncupled Markers Markers are cupled by default. T create markers that are NOT cupled (mve independently n each trace): Press Marker Then Mre Then Cupled Markers OFF Data Analysis Features 177

178 Marker Clrs As shwn in the abve image, in NA and CAT Mdes, markers are the same clr as the trace t which they are assigned. In SA Mde, the marker clr is NOT the same as the trace. Marker clrs can NOT be changed. Marker Trace (CAT and NA Mdes) The Marker Trace setting is used t mve markers between the data trace and memry trace. When Cupled Markers is ON, this setting applies t the active marker fr ALL traces that are cupled. Otherwise, this setting applies t the active marker n nly the active trace. Hw t mve a marker between traces With at least ne marker present, press Marker then Mre. Then select the marker t mve using Marker 1,2,3,4,5,6. Then tggle Marker Trace Aut Data Mem. Aut - Marker resides n data trace when it is visible. Marker resides n memry trace when nly IT is visible (Default setting). Data - Marker resides n data trace, even when nt visible. Mem - Marker resides n memry trace, even when nt visible. Marker Trace (SA Mde) Marker Trace determines the trace number n which a marker resides. A marker is created n, r can later be changed t, the trace number specified by the Marker Trace selectin. When changed, a marker mves t the same X-axis lcatin n the specified trace. Learn mre abut SA Traces n page 106. Hw t mve a marker between traces With tw r mre traces present, press Marker and Enter t create a marker. The marker is created n the current Marker Trace selectin (default setting is 1). Then Mre Then select the marker t mve using Marker 1,2,3,4,5,6. Then tggle Marker Trace 1,2,3,4 The selected marker is mved t the specified trace. When a marker is mved t a blank trace (nt visible) the marker mves t the same X-axis psitin at either the Y-axis psitin f the last data, r t the ZERO psitin. 178 FieldFx User s Guide

179 Marker Frmat The Marker Frmat setting, available ONLY in NA Mde, allws yu t chse the frmat f the marker readut that appears in the upper-right crner f the screen and in the marker table. The marker frmat can be independent f the trace frmat, and can be set independently fr each trace. All markers n a trace have the same marker frmat. Hw t chse marker frmat Press Marker Then Mre Then Marker Frmat Then chse frm the fllwing: Selectin Example Y-axis value Default Same as displayed frmat R + jx Cmplex impedance frmat (3 rd number is distance fr Time Dmain) 22.8Ω -j61.4ω 287.9fF Z Magnitude Impedance Mag Ω Phase 73.8 Real Mre Imaginary Mag & Phase 0.705, T view ther frmats, change the trace frmat, then select Default. Learn hw t change frmat n page 44. Searching with Markers Marker Searches are used t mve markers t lcatins n the trace which exhibits the characteristics f the search criteria. Learn What is a Peak n page 182. Hw t Search with Markers The fllwing menu structure applies t NA Mde. Keystrkes will be slightly different fr CAT, Pulse Measurements, and SA Mdes. Activate the marker t be used fr the search (NOT necessary with Bandwidth search.) Then press Mrk ->/Tls. Then Marker Search Then chse ne f the fllwing: Tracking ON OFF (NA Mde ONLY) ON causes the active marker t search fr the specified criteria with each new sweep. Search criteria can include: Target, Bandwidth, Peak, Min. The searches begin with the first sweep after Tracking is turned ON, based n the current search type. The stimulus setting fr a marker can NOT be changed manually. Trk appears next t the marker number. Data Analysis Features 179

180 OFF causes a new marker search nly when the search feature is reexecuted. Peak Mves the active marker t the HIGHEST amplitude data pint f the trace. Peak Excursin value is ignred. In SA Mde, the LO feed-thrugh signal (0 Hz) is als ignred. Min (Nt available in DTF) Mves the active marker t the LOWEST amplitude data pint f the trace. Target (NA Mde and Pulse Measurements ONLY) Enter the Target value. The marker mves t the first ccurrence f the Target value t the right f its current psitin. The FieldFx interplates between measured data pints t find the exact Target value t tw decimal pints. The interplated X-axis value is displayed in the marker readut r marker table. Subsequent presses f the Target sftkey cause the marker t mve t the right t find the next ccurrence f the Target value. When the marker reaches the end f the stimulus range, it "wraps arund" and cntinues the search frm the beginning f the stimulus range. Bandwidth ON OFF (NA Mde ONLY) Use t quickly tggle BW Markers ON and OFF. When OFF, the marker table appears shwing the X and Y-axis psitins f all enabled markers. Bandwidth (NA Mde ONLY) Specify the level in db frm the peak r valley where bandwidth is measured. Negative numbers search fr a Peak bandpass, such as a filter S21 respnse. Either f the fllwing TWO methds can be used t search fr a Valley r Ntch filter, such as the S11 respnse f a bandpass filter. Negative values search dwn frm the TOP (MAX) f the respnse. Psitive values search up frm the BOTTOM (MIN) f the ntch. If yu first enter Negative, then Psitive values, it may be necessary t press Marker, then Mre, then Markers All Off. S21 f a filter with BW Markers and assciated readut values. The search criteria is -3 db. 180 FieldFx User s Guide

181 S11 f the same filter with same search criteria: -3 db. The same values wuld result frm a search criteria f apprximately db. Press Enter and fur markers are autmatically created t find the first negative r psitive bandpass ver the displayed frequency range. Bandwidth Search can be used ONLY with Lg Mag display frmat. The fllwing six values are displayed fr Bandwidth Search: BW: Width f the filter. (marker 2 freq) minus (marker 3 freq). Center: Marker 4 frequency. Mathematical midpint between marker 2 and marker 3. Q: Center Frequency / Bandwidth. Lss: Marker 1 amplitude. Left: Frequency f marker 2 r 3 (t left f marker 1). Right: Frequency f marker 2 r 3 (t right f marker 1). Press Back t return t the previus menu. Press Peak Search then chse frm the fllwing: Peak Mves the active marker t the HIGHEST amplitude data pint f the trace. Peak Excursin value is ignred. In SA Mde, the LO feed-thrugh signal (0 Hz) is als ignred. Next Peak Mves the active marker t the next highest amplitude peak frm where it currently resides. Peak Left Mves the active marker t the next data pint t the left that meets the Peak criteria. When n data pints t the left meet the Peak criteria, the marker des nt mve. Peak Right Mves the active marker t the next data pint t the right that meets the Peak criteria. When n data pints t the right meet the Peak criteria, the marker des nt mve. The fllwing applies t DTF Measurements ONLY: Mre then: Data Analysis Features 181

182 Track Peaks ON OFF When Track Peaks is ON, markers will find the new peak with every sweep. While in this Mde, the markers can NOT be turned OFF r mved. Find 3 Peaks Three markers are created and find the highest peaks (faults) n the trace. What Is a Peak NOTE Yu define what the FieldFx cnsiders a "peak" by setting the Peak Threshld and Peak Excursin. These tw peak criteria settings are set individually fr each trace and fr each mde (CAT, SA, r NA). These settings d NOT survive a FieldFx r Mde Preset. The Peak Threshld and Excursin settings are NOT available in DTF measurements. T make these settings, create a nn-dtf CAT mde measurement, then change the measurement back t DTF. Hw t set Peak Criteria Press Mrk ->/Tls. In CAT and NA mdes: NOTE Then Peak Search. In SA mde: Then Mre Then Mkr Prperties Then Peak Criteria Then select the fllwing: Peak Threshld Minimum amplitude (db). T be cnsidered valid, the peak must be abve the threshld level. The valley n either side can be belw the threshld level. Default = 190 fr CAT and NA Mdes; 90 fr SA Mde. CAT mde Lss measurements are displayed in psitive values. In these cases, the Peak Threshld setting is inverted. Fr example, Peak Threshld = -20 will cnsider any peak that has less Lss than 20 db t be valid. Peak Excursin The vertical distance (db) between the peak and the valleys n bth sides. T be cnsidered a peak, data values must "fall ff" frm the peak n bth sides by the excursin value. Default = 0.5 db fr CAT and NA Mdes; 6 db fr SA Mde. Fr example, the settings fr the trace in the fllwing image are: Threshld: 10 db Excursin: 1 db Scale = 1 db / Divisin. 182 FieldFx User s Guide

183 Peak A = Valid Peak (Abve Threshld and Excursin Settings) Peak B = Invalid Peak (Belw 1 db Excursin Setting) Peak C = Invalid Peak (Belw 10 db Threshld Setting) Marker Functins Marker functins are used t change FieldFx frequency r distance settings t thse f the active marker. Hw t use Marker Functins Activate the marker t mve. Then press Mrk ->/Tls Then Mkr -> Then chse ne f the fllwing: Mrk -> Center (Nt available in DTF r SA mde with zer span) The center frequency f the measurement becmes the value f the active marker. The frequency span is adjusted accrdingly. Mkr -> Delay (NA mde ONLY.) The grup delay value f the active marker becmes the electrical delay setting f the trace. Learn hw t set grup delay frmat n page 44. Learn mre abut electrical delay n page 47. Mkr->RefLev (SA mde ONLY) The reference level becmes the magnitude f the active marker. Mkr->Tune Freq (SA mde with Tune & Listen ONLY) The Tune & Listen Frequency becmes the frequency f the active marker. The fllwing applies t DTF Measurements ONLY: Mre then: Marker=>Start Distance The Start Distance f the measurement becmes the value f the active marker. Markers that wuld n lnger appear n the screen are mved t the new Start Distance. Marker=>Stp Distance The Stp Distance f the measurement becmes the value f the active marker. Markers that wuld n lnger appear n the screen are mved t the new Stp Distance. Data Analysis Features 183

184 SA Marker Functins The fllwing Marker Functins are available in SA Mde ONLY: Nise Marker Band/Interval Pwer Marker Frequency Cunter at Marker Audi Beep with Marker Time Zer Fixed Marker Learn mre abut these marker functins starting n page 110. All abut Limit Lines Limit lines are visual representatins, drawn n the FieldFx screen, f the specified limits fr a measurement. With this capability, yu can easily cmpare measured data versus specificatins. Optinally, yu can enable an audible beep and display Pass r Fail infrmatin fr each measurement. Yu can have up t as many limit line segments as there are data pints fr each measurement trace allwing yu t test all aspects f yur measurements. Limit lines are available in CAT Mde, NA Mde, and SA Mde. Pwer Meter Mde uses different limit settings. Learn mre n page 148. Limit lines and limit testing are NOT allwed in NA Mde with Smith Chart r Plar display frmats. A simple Display Line is als available in SA Mde ONLY. Learn mre n page 110. Limit lines can be saved and recalled with an *.sta file. Learn mre n page 190. They can als be saved and recalled independently frm the Limit sftkeys. Learn mre n page 187. Hw t Create Fixed Limit Lines There are tw ways t build a Fixed limit line: 1. Build (limits) Frm a Trace. Learn hw n page Enter X/Y data pints int the n-screen editr. The limit line is frmed as the FieldFx cnnects the dts n the screen. T create frequency gaps that are NOT tested, use separate limit lines. The X-axis values fr tw lines can verlap. Press Limit 8. Then Edit Limits. A limit line table appears. Use the Up / Dwn arrws and rtary knb t navigate the cursr t the fllwing editable cells. Descriptin - Press Edit, then enter a descriptin fr the limit line using the FieldFx labeler. Learn hw n page 190. Fixed/Relative Press Edit t tggle between the fllwing: Fixed - the limit line des nt mve. The X/Y crdinates are abslute lcatins n the screen. 184 FieldFx User s Guide

185 Relative - the limit line mves relative t the center frequency and reference level. Nte: It is easiest t first create Fixed Limits, then change this setting t Relative. Learn mre n page 185. Upper/Lwer Press Edit t tggle between the fllwing: Upper - FAILS any measured data pint ABOVE the line. Lwer - FAILS any measured data pint BELOW the line. Off/On Press Edit t tggle between the fllwing: On - Limit line is drawn n the screen and PASS/FAIL testing ccurs. Off - Limit line is NOT drawn n the screen and testing des NOT ccur. Frequency Enter a numeric X-axis value f the data pint. Amplitude Enter a numeric Y-axis value f the data pint. Press Add then chse frm the fllwing: Add Pint - Adds a blank X/Y data pint belw the cursr. Add Limit - Adds a default limit line belw the current limit. Press Clear then chse frm the fllwing: Clear Pint - Remves the X/Y data pint n which the cursr resides. Clear Limit - Remves the limit Line n which the cursr resides. Clear All - Remves ALL limit lines. Press <Back t return t the Limit menu. Relative Limit Lines Relative limit lines are X/Y crdinates that are referenced t the center frequency (X-axis) and Reference level (Y-axis). Use relative limits t test devices r signals that are identical except fr the center frequency r amplitude. With relative limit lines in place, yu change the center frequency f the measurement and the limits lk as thugh they are in the same lcatin. The same is true fr Reference Level. When yu expect t measure a different pwer level, instead f changing the Y-axis value f all f the fixed limits, simply change t relative limits. The limits will then remain a cnstant Y-axis distance frm the Reference Level. Each limit line can be changed at any time frm Fixed t Relative, and Relative t Fixed. Hw t Create a Relative Limit Line The easiest way t create a Relative limit line is t create a Fixed Limit at a specific center frequency and reference level. Learn hw n page 184. Then change the limit line t Relative. The X/Y data pints will be re-calculated relative t the center frequency and reference level. Data Analysis Features 185

186 Build Frm Trace A limit line can be built frm an existing trace. One X/Y pint is made frm each measured data pint. Then, using an ffset value, yu can shift the limit line UP fr upper limits r DOWN fr lwer limits. Once limit lines have been built frm the trace, changes that yu make t the trace, such as frequency range, d NOT change the limits. Hwever, the limit line prperties can be edited just like standard limit lines. A lwer limit line (red) built frm the trace (yellw) shifted dwn 5 db. NOTE Hw t Build Limit Lines frm a Trace Build frm Trace is NOT allwed fr traces with mre than 1001 data pints. Select the trace frm which limits will be built. Press Limit 8. Then Edit Limits. Then Build Frm Trace. A limit line table appears. Use the arrws t select ON. Use Offset t shift the limit line UP r DOWN. Learn hw belw. Limit Optins Hw t set Limit Optins Press Exit if the limit table is visible. Then Optins. Then chse frm the fllwing: Beep On Pass Audible beep sunds when a sweep passes. On Fail Audible beep sunds when a sweep fails. Off N audible beep sunds. Warning On Off Shws Pass r Fail indicatin n the display with each sweep. Data pints that fail are highlighted. 186 FieldFx User s Guide

187 Limit Type Offset Shifts the limit line up r dwn. Enter an ffset value using the rtary knb, the arrws, r by entering a value with the number keys. Enter a psitive ffset t shift the limit line UP, usually used with UPPER limits. Enter a negative ffset t shift the limit line DOWN, usually used with LOWER limits. Margin Shifts the limit line up r dwn like an ffset, but nly virtually. The limit line des NOT appear t mve. Enter a Margin value using the rtary knb, the arrws, r by entering a value with the number keys. Enter a psitive margin t virtually shift the limit line UP. Enter a negative margin t virtually shift the limit line DOWN. Hw t Save and Recall Limits In additin t saving and recalling limits with an *.sta file, limit lines can als be saved and then recalled independent f the current mde r measurement. Use this feature t recall and apply existing limit lines t measurements with different settings r even a different frequency range. Limit line files can be laded int the FieldFx Data Link Sftware. Learn hw in the help file that is included in the Data Link sftware. Hw t Save and Recall Limits Press Save/Recall then Select Device t set the Device (Internal, SD card, r USB flash drive) t be used fr the Save r Recall. Learn mre n page 192. Then press Limit. Then chse frm the fllwing: Save Limits After limit lines have been defined, this saves the line definitin t a file n the specified device. Recall Limits Recalls a limit Line definitin frm the specified device. All abut Trace Math Trace Math is available in CAT (excluding DTF measurements), NA Mde, and FOPS (under USB Pwer Meter mde). A trace is a series f measurement data pints that are cnnected t frm a line. This live data trace is updated as data pints are measured. A memry trace is a live trace that has been stred in the FieldFx vlatile memry. It then becmes static, meaning it is nt updated with measurements. It can be displayed n the screen by itself, r with a data trace fr cmparisn purpses. In NA mde, memry traces are the same clr as data traces, but muted (duller). In CAT mde and FOPS, the data trace is displayed in yellw and the memry trace is displayed in blue. Data Analysis Features 187

188 Hw t display data and memry traces Press Trace 6. Then Data->Mem t stre the current live trace int memry. A beep sunds t cnfirm the data trace has been saved t memry. There is n display anntatin that indicates that the memry trace has been stred. Press Data t view nly the data trace. Press Memry t view nly the memry trace. Press Data & Memry t view bth the live trace and the stred memry trace. Hw t perfrm Trace Math Trace math is perfrmed between a live trace and a memry trace. When ne f the fllwing math peratins are selected, the yellw data trace displays the current measurement with the selected trace math applied. The math peratin symbl indicated belw in [brackets] is displayed n the lwer left crner f the screen. Press Trace 6. If nt already stred, press Data->Mem t stre the current live trace int memry. Then Data Math. Then chse ne f the fllwing: Data + Memry [D+M] Current measurement data is added t the data in memry. Data Memry [D-M] Current measurement data is subtracted frm the data in memry. Data / Memry [D/M] Current measurement data is divided by the data in memry. Math Off [Data] Displays trace data with NO math applied. Abut Math Operatins Data / Memry and Data - Memry math peratins are perfrmed n cmplex linear data befre it is frmatted. Because data is ften viewed in lg frmat, it is nt always clear which f the tw math peratins shuld be used. Remember: dividing linear data is the same as subtracting lgarithmic data. The fllwing illustrates, in general, when t use each peratin. Use Data / Memry fr nrmalizatin purpses, such as when cmparing traces "befre" and "after" a change is made r when measuring trace nise. In the fllwing table, the Data/Mem values intuitively shw the differences between traces. It is nt bvius what Data-Mem is displaying. Values t cmpare Data/Mem Data-Mem 0.5 db and 0.6 db 0.1 db 39 db 0.5 db and 0.7 db 0.2 db 33 db 188 FieldFx User s Guide

189 Use Data - Memry t shw the relative differences between tw signals. Use fr cmparisn f very small signals, such as the S11 match f tw cnnectrs. In the fllwing table, Data/Mem shws bth pairs f cnnectrs t have the same 2 db difference. Hwever, the secnd pair f cnnectrs have much better S11 perfrmance ( 50 and 52) and the relative significance is shwn in the Data-Mem values. Values t cmpare Data/Mem Data-Mem 10 db and 12 db 2 db 24 db 50 db and 52 db 2 db 64 db Data Analysis Features 189

190 File Management The FieldFx can save any f the fllwing types f files: Current settings and calibratin Trace data (*csv and *.S1P) Picture f the FieldFx screen In additin, files can be saved t the internal memry, a USB Flash drive, r a micrsd card. In this Chapter Save Files Recall Files Set File Type and Device Manage Files Manage Flders Edit Keywrds Prefixes fr Filenames See Als Erase User Data Saving and Recalling Files NOTE FieldFx State files are intended t be recalled n the same instrument mdel n which they were saved. Smetimes yu may able t recall them within mdel families. An errr will result when trying t recall a state file that was saved n a different mdel family. The FieldFx mdel families are: N991x (VNA/SA) mdel family N992x (VNA) mdel family N993x (SA) mdel family Save Files Hw t Save a File Press Save/Recall 9 Then Save At the tp f the current labeler screen (see fllwing image) check the File Type t save and Device (Internal, USB, Strage Card) t which the file is saved. Learn hw t change these settings n page 192. Then use the labeler t specify a filename. NOTE Insert nly ONE USB Flash Drive in the FieldFx when saving r cpying files. 190 FieldFx User s Guide

191 Hw t use the FieldFx labeler The FieldFx labeler is used t edit r change the current filename. It is als used fr many ther labeling functins, such as creating a title, prefix, and keywrd t display n the FieldFx screen. Press Select t add the cursr character t the end f the existing filename. Press Backspace t erase the last character frm the current filename. Press Clear t erase the current filename. The preselected keywrds (File, Site, and s frth) can be selected just like a single character. These keywrds can als be edited. Learn mre n page 195. The FieldFx labeler. The current filename is GF2.. The cursr is n the custm GF keywrd. The file will be saved t USB (flash drive). File Type is Picture. Hw t mve the cursr Use the rtary knb t mve cursr n the same rw. The cursr will change rws when it cmes t a rw end. Use the arrws t mve the cursr up and dwn the rws. When the current filename is cmplete Press Dne t save the file t the specified filename. If the filename already exists, a warning is displayed. Press Cancel t clse the labeler withut saving a file. If the filename already exists, yu are prmpted t chse frm the fllwing: Press Yes t verwrite the existing file. Press Cancel t edit the filename. File Management 191

192 Recall Files The FieldFx can recall State files, Trace + State files, and image files. State Files ALL FieldFx instrument settings fr ALL Mdes are saved and recalled in a *.sta file. If errr crrectin is ON in CAT r NA Mde, then calibratin data is als saved and recalled. If errr crrectin is OFF (CalRdy is active), calibratin data is NOT saved in the *.sta file. When a Trace + State file is recalled n a FieldFx ther than the ne it was saved n, differences in the CalRdy calibratin data may result in differences between the displayed traces. Image Files The FieldFx can pen and display *.png, *.jpg, and *.jpeg files. NOTE Hw t Recall a File Befre recalling a file, first Select the Device and Lcatin frm which the file will be recalled. See the fllwing sectin fr mre infrmatin. Press Save/Recall 9 Then Recall Navigate t the file t be recalled using the Up/Dwn arrw keys. Then Recall File r Enter Set File Type and Select Device The fllwing File TYPE and DEVICE settings are used t determine the type f file t save, and the lcatin t be used fr all file peratins. These tw settings remain thrugh an instrument preset, but are reset t the default values when the FieldFx pwer is shutdwn. Select Device (lcatin f File Save/Recall) Press Save/Recall 9 Then Select Device t set the LOCATION where the file is t be saved r recalled. Chse frm the fllwing: NOTE Internal Saves/Recalls files t/frm the FieldFx internal memry. T specify a flder, first select Manage Flders (learn hw n page 195). The Data Link sftware will read data ONLY frm the \UserData flder. SD Card Saves/Recalls files t/frm the SD card (nt included), inserted in the card slt. See FieldFx Tur n page 14. Only the rt flder is available. USB Saves/Recalls files t r frm a USB Flash drive (nt included) that is inserted in ne f the USB cnnectrs. Only the rt flder is available. Insert nly ONE USB Flash Drive in the FieldFx when saving r cpying files. Hw t set File Type State files are the nly file type that can be recalled by the FieldFx. Press Save/Recall FieldFx User s Guide

193 Then File Type. Chse ne f the fllwing: State Saves ALL FieldFx instrument settings fr ALL Mdes t a *.sta file. If a calibratin is ON in CAT r NA Mde, calibratin data is als saved. This file can be pened ONLY by a FieldFx. State files can be saved between cmpatible FieldFx mdels. See nte n page 190. Trace + State Saves the current trace and instrument settings t a *.sta file. In SA Mde, all traces are saved. This file can be pened ONLY by a FieldFx. When recalled, the FieldFx sweep is set t Hld. Picture Saves a 640 x 453 pixel image f the FieldFx screen t a *.png file. The picture des NOT include the sftkeys. Data (S1P) / (2P) Saves CAT and NA Mde trace data t an *.S1P r *.S2P file, depending n the active measurement. This file frmat is used by CAE prgrams such as Agilent's Micrwave Design System (MDS) and Advanced Design System (ADS). It can als be imprted int spreadsheet sftware such as Micrsft Excel. Abut SNP Files The SNP file includes header infrmatin, and the fllwing data: S1P - saves 1-prt (receiver) data fr the active data trace. *.s1p Files cntain 1 stimulus value and 1 S-parameter (ttal f 3 scalar values) Stim Real(Sxx) Imag(Sxx) S2P (NA Mde ONLY) - saves data fr tw S-parameters (S11, S21) if they are bth displayed. *.s2p Files cntain 1 stimulus value and 4 S-parameters (ttal f 9 scalar values) Stim Real(S11) Imag(S11) Real(S21) Imag(S21) Real(S12) Imag(S12) Real(S22) Imag(S22) When parameters are crrected, data is returned even when nt displayed. When parameters are NOT crrected r displayed, and the frmat is Mag/Phase, zer-filled data appears as 0 db and 0 degrees. When the frmat is Real/Imaginary, zer-filled data appears as (1,0). Data is returned with the crrectin type that is applied fr each S-parameter. The crrectin type fr each S-parameter is anntated in the header. Only the data trace is saved nt the memry trace. In CAT Mde, S1P files are always Magnitude(dB) / Phase (angle) frmat. In NA Mde, SNP files fr traces in Smith Chart r Plar frmat saves Real/Imaginary frmat. All ther trace frmats are saved in Mag/Phase frmat. Trace Math is ignred when saving data t an SNP file. Data (csv) Saves trace data frm the current Mde t a *.csv file. This frmat can be imprted int spreadsheet sftware such as Micrsft Excel. In SA Mde, all visible data traces are saved. Each trace is saved t a separate clumn that is labeled with the Trace State. In CAT and NA Mdes, nly the data trace is saved nt the memry trace. In Pwer Meter and VVM Mde, NO data is saved. File Management 193

194 Image f header infrmatin and three rws f data frm a *.csv file saved in SA mde with 4 traces visible. Clumn A is always the frequency at which the data is measured. Manage Files Files that are stred in the FieldFx internal memry, micrsd card, and USB Flash drive, can be cpied t anther device r deleted. Hw t Manage files NOTE NOTE NOTE Press Save/Recall 9 Then Select Device t select the lcatin (Internal, USB, r micrsd Card) f the file t cpy r delete. When selecting Internal, it may als be necessary t first select Manage Flders t specify an active flder which cntains the files t cpy r delete. Then Mre Then Manage Files Then chse frm the fllwing: Fr Cpy File and Cpy All Files, files are always cpied t a subdirectry titled Cpy_<date.time stamp> f when the file was cpied. Fr example, Cpy_June A new subdirectry is created every time a file is cpied. Files can NOT be cpied t ther flders. T get a file t a different flder, it must be saved t the specified flder. Cpy File Select a file t cpy. Then select a device t cpy the file t. Chse frm Internal, USB (must be inserted), r SD Card (must be inserted). Cpy All Files All files that appear will be cpied. Then select a device t cpy the file t. Chse frm Internal, USB (must be inserted), r SD Card (must be inserted). Delete File The selected file is deleted after a warning prmpt is displayed. Insert nly ONE USB Flash Drive in the FieldFx when saving r cpying files. 194 FieldFx User s Guide

195 Manage Flders Yu can create new flders, delete ld flders, and select the active flder t which files can be saved. The Parent flder [..] is listed when nt in the rt directry. Hw t Manage Flders Press Save/Recall 9 Then Mre Then Manage Flders Then chse frm the fllwing: Change Flder Changes the active flder t which files can be saved. The active device and current flder is displayed at the tp f the screen, and belw, a list f files in that flder. Use the arrws t highlight a flder within the current flder. Each time the Change Flder sftkey is pressed, the highlighted flder becmes the active flder. Create Flder A new flder is created in the current flder. Select a name fr the new flder frm ne f the displayed keywrds: Yu can change these keywrds using the fllwing Edit Keywrds functin. Delete Flder The selected flder and its cntents are deleted after a warning prmpt is displayed. A Parent flder r system flder can NOT be deleted. Press Exit when finished. Edit Keywrds The preselected keywrds (FILE, SITE, and s frth) can be edited t meet yur specific needs. Yur keywrds will remain in the FieldFx until yu change them. Keywrds are limited t 30 characters. Hw t edit keywrds Press Save/Recall 9 Then Mre Then Edit Keywrds Then Next Page and Previus Page t view all keywrds. Use the arrws t select a keywrd t edit. When a keywrd is selected, then press Edit. Then chse frm the fllwing: Press Select t add the cursr character t the end f the selected keywrd. Press Backspace t erase the last character frm the end f the selected keywrd. Press Clear t erase the selected keywrd. File Management 195

196 Hw t mve the cursr: Use the rtary knb t mve the cursr alng the same rw. The cursr will change rws when it cmes t a rw end. Use the arrws t mve the cursr up and dwn between rws. When the selected keywrd is cmplete: Press Dne t save all keywrds and clse the Edit Keywrds labeler. These keywrds will exist n the FieldFx until changed. Press Cancel t clse the labeler withut saving changes. Prefixes fr Filenames A prefix is used as a default filename t which characters can be added. The prefix can be custmized, and quickly enabled r disabled. When enabled, the current prefix is autmatically entered as the start f a filename when perfrming a Save peratin. Hw t enable and disable the current Prefix Press Save/Recall 9 Then Mre Then Prefix ON OFF The current selectin is underlined. Hw t edit the current Prefix Press Save/Recall 9 Then Mre Then Prefix Then chse frm the fllwing: Press Select t add the cursr character t the end f the Prefix. Press Backspace t erase the last character frm the end f the Prefix. Press Clear t erase the Prefix. The preselected keywrds (File, Site, and s frth) can be selected just like a single character. These keywrds can als be edited. See Edit Keywrds. Hw t mve the cursr Use the rtary knb t mve cursr n the same rw. Use the arrws t mve the cursr up and dwn the rws. When the Prefix is cmplete Press Dne t save the Prefix and clse the labeler. This Prefix will exist n the FieldFx until it is changed. Press Cancel t clse the labeler withut saving changes. 196 FieldFx User s Guide

197 Printing The current screen r selected files can be printed using a PCL-cmpatible printer (like lder HP Deskjet printer) cnnected t ne f the FieldFx USB prts. Newer PCL3GUI pht and all-in-ne printers are NOT supprted. Measurements can als be printed using the FieldFx Data Link sftware. Hw t print the current screen r a saved file. T save ink, first select an utdr (white backgrund) display clr. Learn hw n page 201. First, t see the Print menu cnnect the printer t a FieldFx USB prt. Then press Save/Recall 9 Then Print and chse frm the fllwing: Printer and Page Setup - Cnfirm that that printer is cnnected and cnfigured prperly. The Status line shuld read Ready. Make ther print settings as desired. Select Files fr Printing - Print up t 16 *.PNG images n ne page that are stred n the Internal drive. Images can NOT be printed frm the USB and SD card. Edit the Quick Settings table t select up t FOUR Rws and FOUR Clumns fr up t 16 ttal images t be printed n a single page. If necessary, edit the filenames t be printed. Select Dne. Then Print Selected Files t begin printing. Print Current Screen Immediately prints the FieldFx screen using the selected Printer and Page Setup settings. File Management 197

198 System Settings In this Chapter Run/Hld Preset User Preset Vlume Cntrl Display Settings Brightness Clrs Trace Width Title Edit Keywrds Full Screen Mde Preferences Quick Settings Table Save and Reset Preferences Language Startup Mde Battery Saver System Cnfiguratin Optins (Licensing) GPS Frequency Reference Surce Vltage Surce (Opt 309) Security Level Date and Time Settings LAN Settings Pwer ON Service Diagnstics System Infrmatin Erase User Data See Als Battery Usage FieldFx Internal Temperatures Run/Hld The Run/Hld key determines whether the FieldFx sweeps cntinuusly r des NOT sweep, but hlds the display results f the last sweep that was perfrmed. 198 FieldFx User s Guide

199 Use Hld t cnserve battery pwer r t allw yu t save r analyze the results f a specific measurement sweep. The current sweep mde is shwn n the screen as: Cntinuus Hld --> Hld is displayed while a single sweep ccurs. Hw t perfrm a single sweep while in Hld Press Sweep 3. Then chse ne f the fllwing: Single Autmatically sets Cntinuus OFF (Hld) and causes FieldFx t make ONE measurement sweep, then hld fr the next Single key press. SA Mde ONLY With Cntinuus OFF each successive Run/Hld press als causes a single sweep. Cntinuus ON OFF Makes cntinuus sweeps. This is the typical setting when battery pwer is nt critical. Preset The Preset key restres the FieldFx measurement settings t a knwn cnditin. Yu can preset the entire instrument, r just the current Mde (CAT, SA, and s frth). When Preset, the FieldFx CalReady calibratin is recalled fr use in CAT and NA Mdes. Learn mre n page 65. In additin t all Preference settings, the fllwing settings always survive Preset and Mde Preset: External Reference state (page 209) SA Units (page 86) SA Crrectin states (page 89) VVM Display Reslutin (page 168) Marker Peak Excursin and Threshld (page 182) Hw t Preset the FieldFx Press Preset. Then chse ne f the fllwing: Preset Returns ALL Mdes t the factry default settings. Mde Preset Returns nly the current Mde t the factry default settings. The current settings fr all ther Mdes remain. System Settings 199

200 User Preset User Preset allws yu t stre custm settings fr each mde, then recall the settings when the Preset key is pressed. Yur custm settings are saved t a standard State file (UserPreset.sta). Hwever, unlike State files, calibratin data is NOT saved. Learn mre abut State files n page 192. Hw t set User Preset Make yur custm settings fr all mdes. When finished, press Preset. Then Save User Preset, then select Yes t cnfirm. Then User Preset ON Hw t recall User Preset Press Preset. Then chse frm the fllwing: Preset (User) The entire UserPreset.sta file is recalled. ALL mdes assume the settings that were in place when the User Preset was saved. The active mde is the mde that was visible when the file was saved. Mde Preset (User) The settings fr nly the current mde are recalled frm UserPreset.sta. NOTES Only the instrument settings are saved t UserPreset.sta. N trace data r calibratin data is saved. User Preset ON / OFF is saved as a Preference setting. Like all preferences, this setting survives a FieldFx shutdwn and pwer ON. Therefre, when User Preset is ON during shutdwn, the FieldFx will lad UserPreset.sta when it is pwered ON. T return t Factry Preset, select User Preset OFF. The cntents f UserPreset.sta remain stred n the FieldFx. When User Preset is OFF, yu can als set the Startup Mde preference that determines which mde will be visible after pwering ON. Learn mre n page 205. Audi (Vlume) Cntrl System vlume cntrl is a FieldFx glbal setting which sets speaker vlume fr ALL success beeps, key press clicks, and individual features that use the FieldFx speaker, such as SA Mde Tune and Listen. The vlume cntrl setting remains thrugh a FieldFx Preset. T cause yur vlume cntrl setting t remain thrugh a FieldFx shutdwn, save the setting as a Preference. Learn hw n page 204. Hw t set FieldFx Vlume Cntrl Press System 7 Then Vlume 200 FieldFx User s Guide

201 Then use the arrws, the rtary knb, r numeric keypad t enter a value between 0 (lwest vlume) and 100 (highest vlume). Press Vlume again and select Mute t quickly turn OFF the speaker vlume. Press Vlume again t set vlume ON t the previus vlume cntrl. Display Settings NOTE Yu can adjust the FieldFx fr ptimum viewing in a wide range f lighting cnditins. Display settings remain thrugh a FieldFx Preset. T cause the display brightness, clr settings, and trace width t remain thrugh a FieldFx shutdwn, save the display settings as Preferences. Learn hw n page 204. Clean the transflective screen with gentle and minimal wiping using Isprpyl alchl applied t a lint-free clth. Display Brightness Change the brightness f the backgrund. Hw t set Display Clrs Press System 7 Then Display Then Brightness Use the arrws, the rtary knb, r numeric keypad t enter a value between 0 and 100%. Display Clrs Change Display Clrs t alter the viewing scheme. Hw t set Display Clrs Press System 7 Then Display Then Display Clrs Then chse ne f the fllwing: Indr Outdr Dusk Outdr Cluds Outdr Sun Night Visin System Settings 201

202 Trace Width Yu can set width f all displayed traces n the FieldFx. This may allw better viewing r enhance the lk f screen images. This setting can be saved with Preferences. Hw t set Trace Width Press System 7 Then Display Then Display Clrs Then Mre Then Trace Width Then chse ne f the fllwing: Nrmal - Standard width. Wide - Enhanced width. Title A custm title can be made t appear in the upper-left crner f the FieldFx screen. The title can cntain up t apprximately 65 alpha-numeric characters. T view the Title area, see the Screen Tur n page 18. Hw t add r edit a Title Press System 7 Then Display Then Title Then enter r edit a title using the FieldFx labeler. This is the same labeler functin that is used t name files. Learn hw t use the labeler n page 190. Then Title ON OFF t make the title appear and disappear frm the screen. Edit Keywrds During a file save peratin, keywrds can be quickly appended t ther text t create unique filenames. The Edit Keywrds feature allws yu t create custm keywrds. Learn all abut Edit Keywrds n page 195. Full Screen Mde Full Screen Mde maximizes the display f trace. The screen anntatins and the sft keys are remved. Hw t set Full Screen Mde Press System 7 Then Full Screen T Exit full screen Mde, press any key. 202 FieldFx User s Guide

203 Preferences FieldFx preferences are settings that survive a shutdwn. When yur FieldFx is turned OFF, then back ON, these settings remain. All preference settings can be restred t their factry defaults. Learn hw n page 204 There are tw ways t make FieldFx preference settings: Frm sftkey selectins thrughut the FieldFx menu structure. D this t temprarily try a setting, then press Save Current Settings (as preferences). Learn hw in the next sectin. Frm the Quick Settings table. Quick Settings Table All preferences can be set frm the Quick Settings table. They are immediately saved as Preferences when Dne is pressed. Hw t view and change Preference Quick Settings Press System 7 Then Preferences Then Preferences Press Next Page and Previus Page t view all settings. T change a setting: Use the arrws t highlight a setting. Then press Edit. The current setting changes t yellw. Sme settings require yu t press a sftkey t change the value. Otherwise, use the numeric keypad, arrws, r rtary knb t change the value. When finished changing a value, press Dne Edit When finished changing ALL preferences, press Dne. All changes are immediately saved as Preferences. T exit the editing sessin withut saving changes, press Esc at any time. Learn mre abut these preference settings: Setting Learn mre Language n page 204 Battery Saver n page 205 Startup Mde n page 205 Display Settings n page 201 Audi n page 200 Date and Time n page 212 GPS n page 206 System Settings 203

204 CAT Distance Units n page 37 Save and Reset Preferences All preference settings can be made at ne time frm the Quick Settings table. All settings that can be saved as preferences (except Battery Saver and Startup Mde) can als be made frm individual sftkey selectins thrughut the FieldFx menu structure. Hwever, they ONLY remain set thrugh a FieldFx shutdwn when the current settings are saved as preferences. The table abve shws a list f all f these settings and where they are discussed in this User s Guide. Hw t save current settings as Preferences Using sftkeys, cnfigure the settings as yu wuld like them t remain. Press System 7 Then Preferences Then Save Current Settings There is a beep when yur settings have been saved. Press Reset Preferences t restre the factry default settings. Language Chse the language in which t display FieldFx sftkeys and ther messages. Select Save Current Settings t set this language as a preference. Hw t select a Language Press System 7 Then Preferences Then Language Then chse frm the fllwing: English Espanl Spanish Deutsch German Italian Italian Francais French Russian Japanese Chinese Turkish 204 FieldFx User s Guide

205 Startup Mde The Startup Mde setting determines the mde that becmes active (visible) when User Preset is set t OFF (Factry Preset) and the FieldFx is pwered ON. Learn mre abut User Preset n page 200. Hw t set Startup Mde Press System 7 Then Preferences Then Preferences Then scrll t Startup Mde and press Edit. Then repeatedly press the Startup Mde t scrll thrugh the available chices. <Default> is the factry default mde fr yur FieldFx mdel. Built-in Pwer Meter Mde is NOT allwed as a Startup Mde. Battery Saver When the battery saver is OFF, the RF surce pwer is left ON at the end f the sweep which cnsumes mre battery pwer. This feature is used in CAT, NA, VVM mdes, and SA mde when the internal surce is turned ON. Battery Saver is the ONLY FieldFx setting that must be made as a Preference frm the Quick Settings table. This setting remains until yu change it again. Hw t set Battery Saver Press System 7 Then Preferences Then Preferences Then scrll t Battery Saver ON Default setting. T cnserve battery pwer, the RF surce pwer is turned OFF at the end f each CAT, NA, and VVM mde sweep. This behavir des nt impact FieldFx measurements. OFF Surce pwer is kept ON at all times, including during trigger Hld mde and between single sweep acquisitins. The RF surce stays at the stp frequency until anther sweep begins. This prvides a cnstant, uninterrupted RF utput frm the RF OUT prt. This behavir als prvides the highest trace stability sweep-t-sweep which may nly be evident while using either single sweep r Run/Hld. With Battery Saver OFF, the use f a full battery charge is reduced by apprximately 45 minutes. System Settings 205

206 System Cnfiguratin Optins (Licensing) Yu can view and install ptins n yur FieldFx. T see a cmprehensive list f the ptins that are available, view the FieldFx Cnfiguratin Guide at: Hw t view the Installed Optins Press System 7 Then System Cnfiguratin Then Optins(Licensing) Then Shw Optins The currently installed ptins are listed. Hw t Install Optins A.lic file must already be n a USB Flash Drive. T learn hw t btain a.lic file, visit: Insert the USB Flash Drive in the FieldFx. Press System 7 Then System Cnfiguratin Then Optins Then Install Optins The FieldFx reads, validates, then installs the ptins. Press and hld the pwer buttn t shutdwn, then restart the FieldFx. NOTE Hw t Delete ALL Optins Deleting individual ptins is NOT supprted. Press System 7 Then System Cnfiguratin Then Optins Then Advanced Then Delete All Optins After a warning message, all ptins n the FieldFx are deleted. Delete All CFG Optins is t be used by Service Persnnel ONLY. Fr mre infrmatin abut Licensing, see the FieldFx Service Manual at: GPS GPS (Glbal Psitining System) allws yu t stamp each data trace with yur physical psitin in latitude/lngitude/elevatin frmat. This can be useful when making measurements n cell twers r ther antennas at remte lcatins. 206 FieldFx User s Guide

207 With Optin 307, GPS is available with the built-in receiver accessed thrugh the tp-panel SMA (f) cnnectr. This cnnectr has a 3.3 VDC bias vltage which is switched ON when GPS is set t Internal. This system is designed fr use with an active antenna such as the Agilent N9910X-825. Withut Optin 307, GPS is usable ONLY with an external GPS receiver that is shipped with Micrsft Streets and Trips and AutRute. The GPS receiver is NOT available frm Agilent. Only the GPS USB receiver is used with the FieldFx. Therefre, it is NOT necessary t purchase the very latest versin f the map sftware. Hw t make GPS settings GPS settings are the same with, r withut, Optin 307. Yur GPS settings can be saved with Preferences. Learn mre n page 204. Press System 7 Then System Cnfiguratin Then GPS Then chse frm the fllwing: Display ON OFF Enable and disable the GPS display n the FieldFx main windw. GPS OFF - Disable GPS (default setting). External - Enable GPS using an external, custmer-supplied, USB dngle device. A check is made t detect a USB GPS device at the USB cnnectrs. Internal - Enable GPS using Optin 307 Built-in GPS. Cnnect a GPS antenna t the tp-panel GPS cnnectr. Learn mre abut additinal GPS antenna accessries at Internal is set autmatically when Frequency Reference Surce is set t GPS. Learn mre n page 209. When Internal r External is selected, a search is made fr satellites verhead. GPS wrks best when utdrs and in full view f the pen sky. When several satellites are fund, the fllwing screen appears (when Display is set t ON) and is updated frequently: System Settings 207

208 The left prtin f the screen shws satellites and the crrespnding number n the adjacent Satellite Pwer chart. GPS Status With GPS enabled the fllwing is displayed at the tp f the FieldFx screen: The fllwing icns (lcated in RED circle abve) indicate the GPS lck status: - GPS ON and lcked n satellites. - GPS ON, but NOT lcked n satellites. - GPS ON, but n GPS receiver is present r detected. The fllwing anntatin (BLUE circle in abve image) indicates the INTERNAL, tp-panel antenna status: Ant: INIT antenna status initializing. Ant: OK antenna present and wrking. Ant: OPEN antenna is nt drawing DC bias current. This culd ccur when an active antenna is nt cnnected prperly r the antenna des nt require DC bias current. Antennas that d nt require bias current can still prvide an accurate GPS reading. Ant: SHORT antenna center pin has been shrted t grund. The internal bias circuitry is disabled fr abut ne minute, then re-enabled. Yu can als press GPS OFF, then GPS Internal t quickly re-enable the antenna bias. Mre GPS settings Press System 7 Then System Cnfiguratin Then GPS Then chse frm the fllwing: Sync Clck ON OFF Enable and disable the synchrnizatin f the FieldFx internal clck t the GPS UTC time standard. NOTE The GPS Sync setting has the same restrictins as the Date and Time setting. Learn mre n page 212. ON The FieldFx clck is synchrnized and updated apprximately every secnd t the time f the GPS clck. OFF The FieldFx clck is NOT synched with GPS. When set t OFF after Sync was ON, the date and time des NOT revert back t the settings befre the clck was synchrnized. Lat/Ln Frmat Change the frmat f the GPS display n the FieldFx screen. Chse frm: ddd mm ss.sss degrees, minutes, secnds (default setting) ddd mm.mmmmm degrees, minutes, fractinal minutes ddd.ddddddd decimal degrees 208 FieldFx User s Guide

209 Elevatin Unit Chse frm: m (Meters) Feet Saving Data with GPS Enabled GPS psitin and clck data are included when data is saved with the fllwing files types: *.csv, *.SnP, State, State+Trace data save. A warning is shwn if the GPS is ON but unlcked at time f save, r if the GPS feature is ON but n GPS is physically present at time f save. The fllwing is a sample S1P file with GPS infrmatin:!gps Latitude: N!GPS Lngitude: W!GPS TimeStamp: 06/25/ :24:48!GPS Secnds Since Last Read: 2 Frequency Reference Surce The FieldFx internal frequency reference surce is used t make accurate and stable measurements. T imprve measurement accuracy and stability, yu can use a highly-stable external 10 MHz reference surce r a precisin timing signal prvided with Built-in GPS (Opt. 307). The Frequency Reference setting will survive a FieldFx r Mde Preset and is saved as part f the Instrument State. When resuming after Stand By, the FieldFx will display an Unlck message while it acquires a lck t an external r GPS surce. Hw t select Frequency Reference Surce Press System 7 Then System Cnfiguratin Then Frequency Ref Then Freq Ref Surce Then chse frm the fllwing: Int Internal frequency reference Ext External frequency reference. Cnnect the 10 MHz External Reference t the Ref In/Trig In SMA (f) cnnectr n the FieldFx tp panel. The FieldFx may take up t 10 secnds t lck t a valid External Reference surce. GPS Available ONLY with Built-in GPS (Opt. 307). When selected, the internal GPS is immediately enabled and a search fr satellites begins. When satellites are fund, the precisin timing signal is NOT used directly, but is used t crrect the abslute frequency f the internal reference many times per secnd. System Settings 209

210 Hld-ver mde When the GPS signal is lst, the last GPS reading is used as a hld-ver crrectin value fr the internal reference. The hld-ver crrectin value is n lnger used, but instead the factry-set crrectin value is used, when any f the fllwing ccur: when GPS is disabled. when Reference Surce is set t Internal. when the FieldFx resumes frm Stand By mde r shut dwn. Frequency Reference Status When switched t Ext r GPS, ne f the fllwing anntatins appears in the lwer-left crner f the screen: EXT R External reference is selected. GPS R GPS reference is selected. GPS H Internal Reference is used with last hld-ver crrectin reading. If the FieldFx des NOT find an apprpriate Ext r GPS reference signal, then Ext Ref UNLOCKED is displayed in the lwer-left crner f the graticule area. This can ccur when any f the fllwing cnditins exist: NO reference signal is present. A lw r very high-level external reference signal is present. Fr best results, the signal shuld be between 5 dbm and +5 dbm. The external reference is ff-frequency. T learn the expected measurement accuracy when cnnected t a frequency reference surce, see the FieldFx specificatins n page 232. Reference OUT The internal 10 MHz frequency reference is available frm the Ref/Trig utput cnnectr n the right-side panel. Use this signal as a cmmn frequency reference when making measurements using external equipment. See this cnnectr n page 17. Vltage Surce (Opt. 309) An internal DC surce, available with Opt. 309, may be used t prvide pwer fr external devices. The maximum pwer available is 8 watts. The vltage is utput thrugh an SMB(m) utput cnnectr lcated n the leftside panel. See the cnnectr n page 17. An ptinal SMB (f) t BNC (m) bias-tee pwer cable is available with Agilent part number: N9910X-713. The fllwing status line is prvided near the tp f the FieldFx screen. Vltage Surce Status Line 1. Vltage surce state: ON, OFF, TRIPPED. 210 FieldFx User s Guide

211 2. Vltage setting frm 1.00 V t V with.01 V reslutin. 3. Current: The amunt f current (in Amperes) being drawn frm the surce. 4. Max Current: A cnservative estimate f maximum current pssible given the present vltage setting. The actual trip level may be slightly different. Hw t make Vltage Surce settings Press System 7 Then System Cnfiguratin. Then Vltage Surce. Then Surce ON OFF t enable and disable the vltage surce utput. Then Vltage x.xx V Using arrws, the rtary knb, r numeric keypad, enter a value between.001 and 32 vlts. Clear Overlad If the vltage surce becmes TRIPPED press t re-enable the vltage surce utput. Then reset Surce ON. Status Line ON OFF Turn ON and OFF the vltage surce status line that appears near the tp f the screen. The status line is always ON while making Vltage Surce settings. Security Level Fr security reasns, yu can prevent frequency infrmatin frm appearing n the FieldFx while in SA, NA, r CAT mdes. Hw t set Security Level Press System 7 Then System Cnfiguratin Then Security Level Then chse frm the fllwing: Nne All frequency settings are visible. High Frequency infrmatin is blanked frm the fllwing: Display anntatin Sftkeys Marker display and marker table Calibratin prperties All settings tables Limit line tables All saved.png files Any f the fllwing will re-display frequency infrmatin: Set t Nne, Preset, Mde Preset, r FieldFx restart. System Settings 211

212 Date and Time, Frmat, and Time Zne Settings NOTE TIPS Set the lcal date and time, Date and Time frmat, and Time Zne that is shwn n the FieldFx screen. The Date and Time is als used t identify files that are saved. The Date and Time can als be set by synchrnizing with GPS satellites. Learn mre n page 206. Because f licensing security, the Date and Time setting is restricted as fllws: Can be set backward n mre than 5 hurs at a time. Can be set frward any amunt f time. Can be set backward r frward n mre than nce in a day. A new day begins at midnight. The GPS Sync setting has the same restrictins. There is n restrictin fr setting the Time Zne. T change the Date and Time backward a significant amunt, send an t ctd-sc_supprt@agilent.cm. BEFORE setting the Date and Time, be abslutely certain that the Time Zne setting is crrect. Hw t set Date and Time, Date and Time Frmat, and Time Zne Press System 7 Then System Cnfiguratin. Then Date and Time. Press the arrws t highlight the rw t be edited. Then press Edit. Use the arrws r rtary knb t select the field t be edited. Use the arrws r numeric keypad t edit that field. Press Cancel r Dne when the edits are cmplete. Press Dne t exit the Date and Time settings. The readut in the upper-right crner f the FieldFx screen will update accrdingly. LAN Settings Cnfigure the LAN settings t be used t cmmunicate with the Data Link Sftware and cnnect t the FieldFx fr remte SCPI peratin. Learn mre abut Data Link at: Learn mre abut remte SCPI peratin at: 212 FieldFx User s Guide

213 LAN Settings NOTE Hw t cnfigure the LAN settings The first three Current... settings can NOT be edited. Press System 7. Then System Cnfiguratin. Then LAN. Use the arrws t select ne f the fllwing, then press Edit. Hstname Change the name that can be used t address the FieldFx if yur server supprts this feature. The default hstname is generated autmatically. Obtain IP Chse frm: DHCP - IP Address is assigned dynamically. If yur server supprts this feature, the IP Address fr the FieldFx is assigned each time it is started. Static - Set the IP Address manually. The Address remains until yu change it. Static IP Address - Enter the IP Address including perids - in the frmat nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Static Subnet Mask - Enter the Subnet Mask including perids - in the frmat nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Static Gateway - Enter the Static Gateway including perids - in the frmat nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn Apply Settings Chse frm: Pwer Up The abve settings take effect when the FieldFx is started. Nw The abve settings take effect immediately. T make the LAN settings persist after pwer up, tggle Apply Settings t Nw then back t Pwer Up. Yu shuld see a message indicating that the LANcnfig file was saved. Press Dne Edit when finished. Pwer ON When the FieldFx is withut a pwer surce, this setting allws the FieldFx t pwer ON as sn as a charged battery r the DC Adapter is inserted withut pressing the pwer buttn. System Settings 213

214 Hw t set Pwer ON Press System 7 Then System Cnfiguratin Then Pwer ON Then chse frm the fllwing: Aut The FieldFx will pwer ON when a charged battery r the DC Adapter is inserted. Manual The FieldFx will pwer ON nly when the pwer buttn is pressed. Service Diagnstics The Service diagnstics menu is generally used t display service-related infrmatin. T access these menu items, press System 7 then Service Diagnstics. System Infrmatin The System infrmatin table shws imprtant infrmatin abut yur FieldFx. The fllwing is the mst useful infrmatin: Mdel Number FieldFx mdel Serial Number Identificatin number f yur FieldFx Firmware Release The currently installed versin f sftware. Check t see if yu have the latest firmware at: Netwrk Identity The netwrk name and current IP address f yur FieldFx. Reflectmeter Factry Cal - The Factry (CalReady) Calibratin shws the date and time that the factry cal was perfrmed fr each test prt and the Thru cnnectin. The frmat is P1 <date time>, P2 <date time>, P1-P2 <date time>. The factry calibratin is updated when yu send yur FieldFx t Agilent fr Instrument Calibratin. Learn mre n page 233. Errr Lg The Errr Lg shws the infrmatin that has appeared n the FieldFx screen. The mst recent infrmatin is at the tp f the table. Press Clear Errrs t erase this infrmatin. Battery Learn abut this table n page 216. Internal Temperatures Learn all abut this table and the imprtance f the internal FieldFx temperatures n page FieldFx User s Guide

215 Erase User Data All data that yu have written t the FieldFx can be erased with the press f a buttn. Yu wuld d this if yur FieldFx is lcated in a secure envirnment and must be rutinely erased f sensitive data. All data is deleted frm the FieldFx internal UserData partitin. This includes all State files and Trace + State files (*.sta), all Data files (*.csv, *.snp), all Picture files (*.png), all Cal Kit files, and all Cable files. External media that is inserted (mini-sd card r USB flash drive) is NOT erased. The "Lst Clusters" flder and files is NOT erased because it is part f the file system husekeeping. Hw t Erase User Data Press System 7. Then Service Diagnstics. Then Advanced Then Erase User Data Then Cnfirm Erase Then the fllwing ccurs: All data files and flders are deleted frm the UserData partitin. A large file f 0s is written t all f the free blcks n the partitin. The large file is deleted. All blcks released by deleting this file are nw available fr use. The FieldFx is rebted, which manages the newly-freed data and re-writes the factry cal kits and cable files. System Settings 215

216 Wrking with the Lithium-In Battery In this Chapter Viewing Battery Charge Status Charging the Battery Recnditining the Battery Battery Care Maximizing Battery Life Battery Dispsal See Als Installing the Battery Cnserving Battery Pwer Battery Safety Cnsideratins Viewing Battery Charge Status Yu can view the battery charge status in the fllwing ways: Icns in the upper right f the frnt panel screen. Battery screen - select System then Service Diagnstics then Battery. Built-in battery gauge. Learn mre in the fllwing sectin. Frnt Panel Icns Icn Status Cnnected t external pwer thrugh the AC/DC adapter. Battery installed and charging. The amunt f charge is indicated by the number f bars shwn. Battery nt charging with 84% battery life remaining. Battery fully charged. A fully charged battery MAY NOT read 100%. Learn mre n page 219, Recnditining the Battery. Service Diagnstics Battery Screen The Battery screen displays the fllwing infrmatin. T access the screen, select System then Service Diagnstics then Battery. Additinal battery infrmatin is available using SCPI cmmands. NOTE 1. Status Fully charged, N battery, Charging, Empty, r Discharging. 2. External DC Supply True r False indicates if an external DC supply is cnnected. 3. Battery Present True r False indicates if a battery is installed. Items 4 thrugh 8 are read directly frm the battery. The infrmatin is based n the battery s internal sensrs and memry. 4. Vltage measured by the battery s sensr. 216 FieldFx User s Guide

217 5. Current amunt f current being cnsumed when perating frm internal battery. If battery is charging, indicates amunt f charging current. 6. Battery Temperature internal temperature f the battery as measured by a sensr embedded in the battery. 7. Present Run Time t Empty minutes f pwer remaining based n amunt f current being used nw. 8. Charge Cycles number f charge cycles the battery has experienced. Charge cycle defined as 80% change in relative state f charge. Built-In Battery Gauge Each lithium in battery has an LED gauge that displays its charge status. The gauge is active unless the battery is in shutdwn mde. T view the LED gauge, pen the FieldFx battery cmpartment dr, remve the battery, then press the buttn n the battery. The battery in yur FieldFx will have either 4 r 5 LED segments. 5-segment Gauge Charge Remaining 4-segment Gauge Charge Remaining 5 segments 80% 4 segments 75% 4 segments 60% t 79% 3 segments 50%,t 74% 3 segments 40% t 59% 2 segments 25% t 49% 2 segments 20% t 39% 1 segment < 25% 1 segment < 20% Charging the Battery When yu receive yur FieldFx, the lithium-in battery is partially charged t apprximately 30% t 40% t preserve battery life. Allw fur hurs t fully charge the battery internally, r three hurs by using the external battery charger (N9910X 872). A fully charged battery will pwer yur FieldFx fr abut fur hurs. It is NOT necessary fr yu t d any type f battery precnditining befre use. The FieldFx circuitry ALWAYS prevents the battery frm discharging t a level that is damaging. Hwever, if the battery is cmpletely discharged, the FieldFx may nt turn ON. If this ccurs, the battery can still be charged either internally r externally. Because a lithium-in battery has n memry effect, yu can charge a battery at any time regardless f the current charge status. Hwever, this culd impair the accuracy f its internal charge-remaining indicatr. When the Max Errr is 10% r greater, the battery shuld be recnditined. Learn mre n page 219. Internal Charging with the AC/DC Adapter Imprtant: Read the safety infrmatin fr the AC/DC adapter n page 223. Internal charging time fr a fully depleted battery is apprximately 4 hurs with the FieldFx either ON r OFF. Wrking with the Lithium-In Battery 217

218 AC/DC adapter T charge a battery inside the FieldFx, insert the AC/DC adapter plug int the Pwer cnnectr n the FieldFx side panel, then plug the adapter int an AC utlet. FieldFx ON: Charging is indicated by a battery icn in the upper right f the frnt panel screen. FieldFx OFF: Charging is indicated by the FieldFx pwer LED glwing amber, with its intensity increasing frm dim t bright every few secnds. This pattern repeats until the LED turns ff when charging is dne. Learn mre n page 15. Using the External Battery Charger (N9910X 872) Imprtant: Read the safety infrmatin fr the External Charger n page 224. External Battery Charger (N9910X 872) 218 FieldFx User s Guide